Home

ZyXEL GS2200-8/24 User's Manual

1. M 237 inerentisted Sel viDe cin 240 pe Re M 244 ARP Ecl a pa 250 Halen a ada aaa 255 A IO 261 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Contents Overview Bug T r P METRE 285 A AN 287 Cluster Mano gp m E 290 iP c a 296 umi eit T 299 POPES CIONES HR 301 bsc er tT T 303 dis aa aia A v Rb Red INPG a UD PE Ha Tdd use Dai Eh dibibeva diu be Up dbbc ario MduAn 307 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents Dis WII a UTE eee 3 a 6 a Sete T M 8 A o A 9 TAS Ci PT 11 Part E Users Ici Mee TX 21 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Riu cocinan ari ii 23 jM INPOdUCISN sai 23 Ll BS DS AICA ida ria 23 Toe BOUM A A Med ehaidadnneaiacede aeees 24 113 Hoh Perermanbe switebing EXIIplp ii caue hue 24 1 1 4 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Examples cnn iria la entran 25 1 2 Ways 10 Manage Mes ii cor 26 1 3 Good Habits tor Managing the SiO siria A 26 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeessneeee
2. LABEL DESCRIPTION Timer Status Select this option to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port or allow specific packets on a port after the error was gone Deselect this option to turn off this rule Interval Enter the number of seconds from 30 to 2592000 for the time interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 29 Error Disable GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Static Route 30 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers for example using HTTP Telnet SSH or SNMP Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations that are not reachable through the default gateway The Switch can also use static routes to send data to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway for example when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1 The Switch sends reply traffic to default gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager s computer The Switch ne
3. LABEL DESCRIPTION Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following e DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data e AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets Group SNMP v3 adopts the concept of View based Access Control Model VACM group SNMP managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs Specify in which SNMP group this user is admin Members of this group can perform all types of system configuration including the management of administrator accounts readwrite Members of this group have read and write rights meaning that the user can create and edit the MIBs on the Switch except the user account and AAA configuration readonly Members of this group have read rights only meaning the user can collect information from the Switch Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click C
4. LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 25 9 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 131 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Configure VLAN Start YID End VID Apply VID Enabled Log Na None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the
5. S 137 Dy EV 1l T 137 Tab NUBE TOLL a e ss a dab bae DOSE addi b ER Fa adc 137 TAL CDI UNG OT ON M E 137 L5 DW Agm egati AE a Teter o d rro v p a Fu tae oda uaa 138 IFAI CNH iie E T cn 140 174 Link Aggregation Control Protocol si 142 A on adea aaa bnc a dps Sa adr n doped ad pcs aas a Ra d ar RA ES 143 12381 Sas THERE EX SII sai 143 Chapter 18 A A AA A AA 145 jo mE yr rd AAA 145 19 5 71 Xa TOL EDI sr A al 145 181 2 Whal You Need Io ROW sii 145 182 ue nrc recu ue sterile A uU trey Taerty 146 TSS Aria IEEE 2 n0 c 147 183 T Oues VLAN conri 148 Chapter 19 o get T 151 NES II NE LP T 151 CREE OCURRE S 151 A aAA maaan eee 152 Chapter 20 Classe ia 154 TOVON AAA A 154 emm Iu TOCADA aria A ariaaian peeasaan A pemisastaNereItNAS 154 ZU T Wal You Sed ICAO escitas ios 154 0 2 CONRO le Cassie uo 154 20 2 1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Gonfiguration cnica eti n ehe rob etna 156 20 ASE ING CDI Mem TUR 158 Chapter 21 jo O 160 21 1 Paley Rules Cre ret XR E I I 160 FANE TIU UE IM E NR E TNT 160 Tae CGonngudng Poty RUDE ssee ce sa ded cco ceed asc a E EErEE r EE 160 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 21 2 1 Viewing a
6. Table 122 Management gt Cluster Management Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 38 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration to display the next screen Figure 194 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration LE Clustering Management Configuration Status Clustering Manager Active Vv Name Master VID fi Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate List Password Add Cancel Refresh Index MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel 292 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 123 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that
7. Ethernet Ports Dual Personality Interfaces Figure 12 Front Panel GS2200 24P LEDs Console Port m CONSOLE TIAM E 652200 3 4 PoE Ethernet Ports Dual Personality Interfaces The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 2 Front Panel Connections LABEL DESCRIPTION 8 or 24 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub a wireless AP an Ethernet switch or router 1000 RJ 45 Ethernet Ports GS2200 8 or GS2200 24 only 8 or 24 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub a wireless AP an Ethernet switch or router 1000 BASE T PoE Ports The GS2200 8HP supports the IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet PoE standard and GS2200 8HP or the GS2200 24P supports the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard Ports 1 to 4 on the GS2200 8HP GS2200 24P can supply power of up to 30W per Ethernet port Ports 5 to 8 on the GS2200 8HP and only ports 1 to 24 on the GS2200 24P can supply power of up to 15 4W per Ethernet port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Panels Table2 Front Panel Connections continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 2 or 4 Dual Each interface has one 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable Personality SFP slot also called a mini GBIC slot with one port or transceiver active at a time Interfaces Note The ports change to fiber mode directly when inserting the fiber module Two or four 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ports
8. LABEL DESCRIPTION Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer congested Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporate
9. Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 25 8 on page 206 Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log I nterval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 37 on page 287 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Enter how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server En
10. Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 67 Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently ventilated RPM cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Note The fan speed information is available only on the GS2200 8HP and GS2200 24P that have fans Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls
11. LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address automatically Static IP Address Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address information to the Switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address This is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port cannot access the device To access the Switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Management IP Addresses You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s You must configure a VLAN first
12. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Use ONLY power wires of the appropriate wire gauge see Chapter 43 on page 307 for details for your device Connect it to a power supply of the correct voltage see Chapter 43 on page 307 for details Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Fuse Warning Replace a fuse only with a fuse of the same type and rating The POE Power over Ethernet devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general wa
13. VID Enabled Option82 Information No y Li O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 25 5 on page 199 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 8 on page 66 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configur
14. Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration To configure MSTP ports click Port in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP screen Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port D MSTP Port Configuration g MSTP Port m li LIS KI II ILI co Qq amp Why ss Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as
15. Fixed Clear orb n VLAN Status Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M TxTagaing Tx Tagging I Tx Tagging FT Tx Tagging 8 Normal gt Forbidden v lagi v Tx Tagging Go to Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting and set the PVID of the ports 5 6 and 7 to 100 This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5 6 and 7 with the tag 100 Figure 27 Tutorial Tag GVRP Ingress Check NEEDED n NN Untagged Frames Subnet Based Vlan O O GVRP Acceptable Frame Type Al Y AL 8 Al y an w OVO pop A 0 0 0 Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Trunking SEG SE Soe VLAN Status Isolation Oo GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown Click Apply Figure 28 Tutorial Specify DHCP VLAN E DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active Iv DADA C Disable s ioo Database Agent URL Timeout interval 00 seconds Write delay interval oo seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew 5 Click the Port link at the top right corner P rig VLAN DHCP Snooping 6 The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port
16. GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Figure 56 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Index Active A Subnet Based VLAN J Active O DHCP Vlan Override r1 Vlan Port Setting Add Cancel Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address through the DHCP Override VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN Mask Bi
17. Use the Loop Guard screen Section 26 2 on page 217 to enable loop guard on the Switch and in specific ports 26 1 2 What You Need to Know Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EM Chapter 26 Loop Guard t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 135 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same por
18. changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 150 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Port Security 19 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to set up port security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The Switch can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated 19 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Port Security screen Section 19 2 on page 152 to enable port security and disable MAC address learning You can also enable the port security feature on a port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 151 Chapter 19 Port Security 19 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 95 Advanced Application gt Port Security MAC Freeze
19. sip Favorites 3g J suggested sites E Free Hotmail 2 Web website has errors e Web Configurator This problem might indicate an attempt to J deb v Page y Safety Tools z Sev Lo Signin gt fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage El Save About certificate errors View certificates Port Name Link STOP 1 Down Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 IP Application a 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 2 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Status El Logout H Help Up Time 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 E 0 00 00 0 00 00 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Click Install Certificate and follow the on screen instructions to install the certificate in your browser Figure 185 Certificate Internet Explorer 7 or 8 Certificate General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted To enable trust install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store Issued to 3654700 0019cb000001 Issued by XG54700 0019cb000001 Valid from 1970 01 01 to 2030 03 27 Install Certificate GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages When you attempt to access
20. 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from managing the Switch if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configurat
21. 59 y 60 y 61 y 62 y 63 y Apply Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 P Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide DHCP 32 1 DHCP Overview This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server If you configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 32 1 1 What You Can Do Use the DHCP Status screen Section 32 2 on page
22. DESCRIPTION Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for a specific control packet is exceeded and take the action selected below GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 29 Error Disable Table 91 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate limit on a port set in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection screen e inactive port The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received e inactive reason The Switch bypasses the processing of the specified control packets such as ARP or IGMP packets or drops all the specified control packets such as BPDU on the port rate limitation The Switch drops the additional control packets the port has to handle in every one second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your c
23. Figure 57 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 9 6 1 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Note You can not enable protocol based VLANs on the Switch when the Guest VLAN feature is activated on a port Figure 58 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN LE Protocol Based VLAN Vlan Port Setting Active Ci Port Name ej IP Y Ethernet type C Others Hex VID Priority o Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 9 on page 83 for more details on setting up VLANs Name Enter up to 32 alpha numeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protoco
24. Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol based VLAN Port based VLAN l o NA pps TT CPUProtection Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Power over Ethernet Advanced Application GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 41 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 127 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports which Port are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus should be Application copied to the
25. GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION New Time Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the hh min ss Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the mm dd Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their Time clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All o
26. LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 0 means this feature is disabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Classifier
27. Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Edge Priority Select this check box to
28. 1 byte This value is always O for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings General Setup 32 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 157 IP Application gt DHCP Status a Nunc g Global VLAN Relay Status Relay Mode None GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 IP Application gt DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Mode This field displays None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 32 3 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 158 P Application gt DHCP gt Global CE DHCP Relay Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information CI Option 82 Information L1 Cancel The follo
29. 25 10 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard 25 10 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a
30. 9 DI HE Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status Acceptable Frame Type All All All All All All All All Dr v lt lt lt v v VLAN Trunking O m EDS 9E E DE 8 I up mm p E o n Isolation O O 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 3 3 Configuring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application gt DHCP and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the Information check boxes GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 37 Tutorial Set DHCP Server and Relay Information E DHCP Relay g Status Active Iv Remote DHCP Server 1 19216823 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information M Option 82 Information Vv Gs2200 Apply Cancel 6 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 7 The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the D
31. Click on the RADI US Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 117 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup A RADIUS Server Setup AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 m 2 fo 0 0 0 i812 Li Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout o seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 fo 0 0 0 1813 IN 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set
32. Ethernet l PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets 148809 pps at 100 Mbps 1488095 pps at 1 Gbps with 64 bytes packets GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 43 Product Specifications Table 130 Feature Specifications continued STP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol QoS IEEE 802 1p with 8 CoS per port 802 3x flow control SPQ WFQ or SPQ WFQ combination capable Rule based bandwidth control ingress traffic metering dropping 64Kb stepping Rule based traffic mirroring IGMP snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 16 VLAN maximum user configurable DSCP to 802 1p priority mapping VLAN Port based VLAN 802 1Q tag based VLAN number of VLAN 4K 1000 static maximum GVRP for dynamic registration Private VLAN for port isolation Protocol Based VLAN IP subnet based VLAN Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic by LACP Eight groups up to eight ports group randomly selected Port mirroring Rule based port mirrorring Port based mirroring Support port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64 Kb increments Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast Multicast Unknown Uicast Storm Control 1 pps stepping Rate Limiting Support rate limiting per IP TCP UDP port IP services DHCP client DHCP relay Filtering Support L2 MAC filteri
33. First successful access None Last ignored bindings counters Binding collisions 0 Invalid interfaces 0 Parse failures 0 Expired leases 0 Unsupported vlans 0 Last ignored time None Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans A The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 25 5 on page 199 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 197 Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 69 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dyn
34. Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION pis Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable dynamic link aggregation Aggregation Control Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 44 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION System Priority LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number LACP Timeout Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Timeout is the time interval bet
35. Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit These settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter O to disable this limit Burst interval seconds The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for each port For example if the rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 77 ARP Inspection Port Configure continued
36. Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device GS2200 8 24 User s Guide About This User s Guide Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The GS2200 8 GS2200 8HP GS2200 24 and GS2200 24P may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Differentiation is made where needed Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen
37. Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 23 6 1 MVR Group Configuration 178 All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 110 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration MVLAN ED Group Configuration MN NN MVR Multicast VLAN ID X Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Add Cancel Delete Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop down list VLAN ID box Name Enter a descriptive name for ide
38. Section 11 2 on page 104 to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s 11 1 2 What You Need To Know A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them You can configure this in the Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting screen see Section 23 3 on page 171 Figure 63 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup within a VLAN group Figure 64 shows frames being forwarded to devices connected to port 3 Figure 65 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 Figure 63 No Static Multicast Forwarding 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Mul
39. Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent Circuit ID sub option The variable options include sp sv pv and spv which indicate combinations of slot port slot VLAN port VLAN and slot port VLAN respectively The Switch enters a zero into the PADI and PADR packets for the slot value delimiter Select a delimiter to separate the identifier string slot ID port number and or VLAN ID from each other You can use a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 28 3 1 PPPOE IA Per Port Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the Switch add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per port basis Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch and there are no trusted ports Click the Port link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 144 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port OOO po 0 Oh L0 Nor x o X LIER VLAN Int
40. This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Multiple RSTP on page 111 for more information on MRSTP Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Iree Protoco Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 1 C 32768 w 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 2 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost Tree z r3 ilv 1 F v 128 4 1 2 v 128 4 1 3 F v 128 4 1i 4 C Y 128 4 1 m 5 v 128 4 1 w 6 O v 128 4 1i A T s a 4 o CUM cuoco Wee nen a The following table describe
41. This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network Layer 2 Protocol This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Static Routing Tunneling settings on the Switch PPPoE This link takes you to screens where you can configure how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPOE client Errdisable This link takes you to a screen where you can configure CPU protection and error disable recovery IP Application This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings ARP Learning This link takes you to a screen where you can configure ARP learning mode on a per port basis Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system
42. Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device The Switch Computer Notebook computer L _ N lt gt NES A LL GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Document Conventions Server DSLAM Firewall Telephone Router GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not obstruct the device ventillation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information
43. VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of O is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Pr
44. cables to run down the back of the Switch Note Make sure the screws are securely fixed to the wall and strong enough to hold the weight of the Switch with the connection cables GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 Align the holes on the back of the Switch with the screws on the wall Hang the Switch on the screws Figure 7 Wall mounting Example The Switch should be wall mounted horizontally The Switch s side panels with ventilation slots should not be facing up or down as this position is less safe 435 mm The following are dimensions of a self tapping screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm Figure 8 Masonry Plug and 3 5 mm Self Tapping Screw SEE GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Hardware Panels 3 1 Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 2 Front Panels The following figure shows the front panel of the Switch Figure 9 Front Panel GS2200 8 LEDs Console Port ZyXEL GS2200 8 Ethernet Ports Dual Personality Interfaces Figure 10 Front Panel GS2200 8HP Console Port ZyXEL 52200 8HP PoE Ethernet Ports Dual Personality Interfaces GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Chapter 3 Hardware Panels Figure 11 Front Panel GS2200 24 LEDs Console Port ZyXEL AMA 652200
45. can be represented as 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 and counting up the number of ones in this case results in 24 MGR Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Refer to Table 52 on page 158 for more information Destination IP Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address i Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Prefix asd Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Refer to Table 52 on page 158 for more information Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 20 2 1 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuratio
46. connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 103 MVR Network Example e e e e VLAN 1 SS BB eB ee ee eee eee Beesd Multicast VLAN E VLAN 2 Un mmmmmmw maja a S VLAN 3 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices
47. la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications Go to http www zyxel com Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page Select the certification you wish to view from this page GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Appendix C Legal Information ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of G
48. port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 5 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Services Provider may divide different types
49. select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 89 Trunking Example Configuration Screen E Link Aggregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria T2 Ei src dst mac y T3 ri sre dst mac T4 ri sre dst mac T5 O l src dst mac r D cH Port Group Cancel Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Port Authentication 18 1 Overview This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x authentication method Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following method for port authentication e EEE 802 1x An authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user 18 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Port Authentication screen Section 18 2 on page 146 to check if IEEE 802 1x port authentication is activated Use the 802 1x screen Section 18 3 on page 147 to activate IEEE 802 1x security Use the Guest VLAN screen Section 18 3 on page 147 to activate IEEE 802 1x security 18 1 2 What You Need to Know IEEE 802 1x authentication uses the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See RADIUS and TACACS on p
50. 0 and later Mozilla Firefox 3 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 4 Start your web browser Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 18 Web Configurator Login Authentication Required amp 9 username and password are being requested by http 192 168 1 1 The site says GS2200 at Thu Jan 1 01 07 00 1970 User Name admin Password 9 Cancel Click OK to view the first web configurator screen GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator This guide uses the GS2200 24P screens as an example The screens may vary slightly for different models The following figure shows the navigating components of
51. 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 25 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example i VLAN 1 i 8 1 VLAN1 VLAN2 at i E i Mi Po LUI i ON NE S a fr HAS DA pos NEN 1 Md X i mmmm 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 39 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the web configurator and in some cases are necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 34 6 1 on page 259 SNMP The Switch can be monitored by an SNMP manager See Section 35 7 1 on page 270 Cluster Management Cluster Ma
52. 245 to display the relay mode Use the DHCP Relay screen Section 32 3 on page 246 to enable and configure global DHCP relay Use the VLAN Setting screen Section 32 4 on page 247 to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients 32 1 2 What You Need to Know Read on for concepts on DHCP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter DHCP Modes If there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch he
53. 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch Address that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 30 Static Route T
54. 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 are specific to the GS2200 8 The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 are specific to the GS2200 8HP Table 112 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 271 Chapter 35 Access Control Table 112 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION temperature TemperatureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the temperature goes above or below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 5 8 56 27 2 2 5 8 59 27 2 2 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range voltage VoltageEventOn VoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 5 8 56 27 2 2 5 8 59 27 2 2 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the voltage g
55. 55 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 goun 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 lldp LLDPRemoteTopologyChang 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 This trap is sent when the LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol remote topology changes transceiver ddm DDMI RxPowerEventOn DDMI TemperatureEventOn DDMITxBiasEventOn DDMITxPowerEventOn DDMI VoltageEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when one of the device operating parameters such as transceiver temperature laser bias current transmitted optical power received optical power and transceiver supply voltage is above or below a factory set normal range DDMI RxPowerEventClear DDMI TemperatureEventClea r DDMITxBiasEventClear DDMITxPowerEventClear DDMIVoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when all device operating parameters return to the normal operating range 274 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 114 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user
56. Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 25 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard DHCP Snooping GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Figure 122 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping g Configure IPSG Database Status Description Status Agent URL Write delay timer 300 seconds Abort timer 300 seconds Agent running None Delay timer expiry Not Running Abort timer expiry Not Running Last succeeded time None Last failed time None Last failed reason No failure recorded Times Total attempts D Startup failures 0 Successful transfers 0 Failed transfers 0 Successful reads 0 Failed reads 0 Successful writes 0 Failed writes 0 Database detail Description Status
57. Authorization see AAA 182 authorization 182 privilege levels 188 190 Index setup 188 auto crossover 34 automatic VLAN registration 84 back up configuration file 258 bandwidth control 129 egress rate 130 ingress rate 130 setup 130 basic settings 66 basic setup tutorial 51 binding 193 binding table 193 building 194 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 110 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 110 broadcast storm control 132 C CDP 222 certifications 321 notices 321 viewing 321 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 83 changing the password 44 Cisco Discovery Protocol see CDP CIST 127 Class of Service CoS 240 classifier 154 156 and QoS 154 editing 156 example 158 overview 154 setup 154 156 viewing 156 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Index cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 290 and switch passwords 293 cluster manager 290 293 cluster member 290 293 cluster member firmware upgrade 295 network example 290 setup 292 specification 290 status 291 switch models 290 VID 293 web configurator 294 cluster manager 290 cluster member 290 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 127 configuration 239 change running config 257 configuration file 45 backup 258 restore 45 258 saving 256 configuration saving 44 console port 33 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 321 CPU management port 96 CPU protection configuration 232 overview 231 current date 70 current
58. GS2200 24 Per GE Ethernet RJ 45 100 1000 port LNK ACT FDX GS2200 24P GS2200 8HP Per GE PoE Ethernet RJ 45 100 1000 port LNK ACT PoE Per mini GBIC slot LNK ACT Per 1000BASE T RJ 45 port in dual personality interface LNK ACT FDX GS2200 24 24P only Operating Environment Temperature 09 C 509 C 322 F 1222 F Humidity 10 9596 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 402 C 702 C 402 F 1582 F Humidity 10 9596 non condensing Fuse Specification 250 VAC T2A Console port D Sub 9 pin Female DCE Capacity GS2200 8 8HP 20 Gbps GS2200 24 24P 56 Gbps Forwarding Rate GS2200 8 8HP 14 9 million packets per second GS2200 24 24P 41 7 million packets per second Table 129 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User Name admin Default Password 1234 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 43 Product Specifications Table 129 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also available Maximum Frame Size 9 K 9216 bytes VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logic
59. Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard DHCP Snooping Configure Port Figure 124 DHCP Snooping Port Configure yi SEEN E E ICON 104960 SG ses es zi A DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted D Untrusted y NN Untrusted y a Untrusted y IT Untrusted y Untrusted y n Untrust OM Ae di 1 l i Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the
60. IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation VID Type the VLAN group identification number Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation Add Click Add to insert the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule IP Address This field displays the IP address IP Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Default Gateway This field displays the IP address of the default gateway Delete Check the management IP addresses that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check boxes in the Delete column GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Po
61. LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Ingress Check If this check box is selected the Switch discards incoming frames on a port for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PVID A PVID Port VLAN ID is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines Enter a number between land 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Frame Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only and Untag Type Only Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this
62. MAC address filters that were created because filters the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete 204 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 73 ARP Inspection Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table I P The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 25 7 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Applica
63. Multicast Group Flooding C Drop Immed Group Max Group IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Port NormalLeave Fast Leave See F Throttling Leave Limited Num Profile Mode e jol o eoo cbo eoo e fon e joo cpo hoo epo Deny y Default y Deny Default y Deny gt Default v Deny gt Default y Deny z Default c hon O po Deny z Default x ho cho Dey i Deraut i 40 cepo Deny gt Auto y Auto y Auto y Auto y Auto v Auto y THT ERU SH aHa Hu HuHu Ha O Auto y MO mn fi win 050207070500 0 O gt Apply Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 171 Chapter 23 Multicast 172 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control pac
64. PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port 28 2 The PPPoE Screen Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch Click Advanced Application gt PPPOE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Click Click Here to go to the Intermediate Agent screen Figure 142 Advanced Application gt PPPoE Intermediate Agent Eddie Intermediate Agent Click here GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 225 Chapter 28 PPPoE 28 3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPOE client Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 143 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent circuit id Intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE Active access node identifier identifier string Active F option spy Y delimiter v Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch access node identifier Enter up to 20 ASCII characters to identify the PPPoE intermediate agent Hyphens
65. PPPOE lA Per Port Per VLAN Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 28 PPPoE Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent Port screen to display the screen as shown Figure 145 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN LG VLAN Port Show Port Port Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Port 2 VID Circuit id Remote id 10 11 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified VLAN s on the port Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below Port This field displays the port number specified above VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN
66. Port List Port Security a OLA ETT Active FJ Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address O al 1 O Y 0 2 O Y 0 3 O v D 4 O v 5 O v o Ads Mr a SR Hxc ed m A 26 O v 0 27 O v 0 28 O v 0 MAC freeze The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Table 47 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued
67. SNMP manager Click Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group to view the screen as shown Figure 173 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group GS2200 24P REITE SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP 192 168 1 99 v Type Options System coldstart warmstart fanspeed temperature voltage reset _ timesync C intrusionlock loopguard O errdisable O poe Interface O linkup O linkdown C idp C transceiver ddm AAA C authentication C accounting IP C ping C traceroute Switch C stp mactable O rmon C cfm The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP addresses of IP the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See SNMP Traps on page 271 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all
68. Section 25 9 2 on page 210 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 25 9 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 129 ARP Inspection Configure Active Filter Aging Time Filter aging time Log Profile Log buffer size Syslog rate Log interval ARF Inspection Configure Rz o r Bo seconds 32 entries 5 entries 1 seconds Apply Cancel VLAN ARP Inspection GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 207 Chapter 25 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Enter O if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent
69. Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 72 on page 116 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for desi
70. VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to Chapter 9 on page 83 for more information on VLAN Figure 43 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup a JENTECTE 802 10 O PortBased ARP Aging Time Aging Time 300 seconds VLAN Type Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level M Level6 Level5 Level4 Level3 Level2 Level1 Level0 ajo a T x x Ex x Ix IR x wm oj2je Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 9 on page 83 for more information ARP Aging Time Enter a time from 60 to 1000000 seconds This is how long a dynamically learned ARP entry can remain in the ARP table before it is cleared and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued
71. Wall mounting GS2200 8 This section shows a few examples of using the Switch in various network environments 1 1 1 Backbone Application The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBI C port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application die Internet gt At Sales ah 7 a Y ee eee eee eee eee ee ee ee ee m mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
72. a web configurator screen Figure 19 Web Configurator Home Screen for GS2200 24P Status El Save Statu El Logou H Help B D E Port Name Link State PD LACP TxPkts RxPkts mo Tx KB s RxKB s Up Time A coe 4 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 On A Down STOP Of Disabled 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 2 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 System Info m Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 General Setup B Down STOP Off Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Switch Setup i Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 IP Setup 8 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Port Setup 8 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 PoE 10 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 phi Down STOP off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 A 13 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 iz Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 100M F FORWARDING Off Disabled 136 229 0 38 874 11 527 0 01 45 19 Down STOP Off Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 20 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 21 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 22 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 23 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 24 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2
73. address and MAC address mapping information for hosts A and B in its ARP table and host A wants to ping host B Host A sends an GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 33 ARP Learning ARP request to the Switch and then sends an ICMP request after getting the ARP reply from the Switch The Switch finds no matched entry for host B in the ARP table and broadcasts the ARP request to all the devices on the LAN When the Switch receives the ARP reply from host B it updates its ARP table and also forwards host A s ICMP request to host B After the Switch gets the ICMP reply from host B it sends out an ARP request to get host A s MAC address and updates the ARP table with host A s ARP reply The Switch then can forward host B s ICMP reply to host A x N ARP Request ARP Reply I CMP Request ARP Request ARP Reply ICMP Request ICMP Reply ARP Request ARP Reply ICMP Reply Gratuitous ARP A gratuitous ARP is an ARP request in which both the source and destination IP address fields are set to the IP address of the device that sends this request and the destination MAC address field is set to the broadcast address There will be no reply to a gratuitous ARP request A device may send a gratuitous ARP packet to detect IP collisions If a device restarts or its MAC address is changed it can also use gratuitous ARP to inform other devices in the same network to update their ARP table with the n
74. and spaces are also allowed The default is the Switch s host name circuit id Use this section to configure the Circuit ID field in the PADI and PADR packets The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port or for a specific VLAN on a port has priority over this The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port in the Advanced Application PPPoE Intermediate Agent gt Port screen or for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has priority over this That means if you also want to configure PPPoE IA Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN setting leave the fields here empty and configure circuit id and remote id in the Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN screen Active Select this option to have the Switch add the user defined identifier string and variables specified in the option field to PADI or PADR packets from PPPOE clients If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string using CLI commands on the Switch the Switch will use the string specified in the access node identifier field identifier string Specify a string that the Switch adds in the Agent Circuit ID sub option You can enter up to 53 ASCII characters Spaces are allowed GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 28 PPPoE Table 86 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent continued LABEL DESCRIPTION option
75. buttons and click Search to only display the data which matches the criteria you specified Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry Select VI D and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to the specified VLAN Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses which are forwarded on the specified port Sort by Define how the Switch displays and arranges the data in the summary table below Select MAC to display and arrange the data according to MAC address Select VI D to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Select PORT to display and arrange the data according to port number Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into static entries They also display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into MAC filtering entries These entries will then display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is Discard source Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Ind
76. by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure here has the highest priority Remote id Apply Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a specific port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure here has the highest priority Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 28 PPPoE 28 3 3 PPPoE IA for VLAN Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the Switch appends the Circuit ID and or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a specific VLAN Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 146 Advanced Application gt PPP
77. configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 27 on page 110 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Span
78. current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 71 DHCP Snooping Port Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 25 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 32 on page 244 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application I P Source Guard DHCP Snooping Configure VLAN Figure 125 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure A DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply
79. example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID 1 Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN in the navigation panel Then click the VLAN Port Setting link 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for port and click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 2 Configuring Switch 1 are Management IP Address rcm Nos p lt gt z N GVRP Ingress Check Port PVID ED VLAN Port Setting O O GVRP Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation Cancel The default management IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example Figure 24 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address f N ea No Y GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch Make sure your computer is in the sa
80. gt e BEREE gt 5 e BIB Ribble gt gt gt e ERRE gt gt gt e BEREE e gt e ERIBERBIE e gt gt gt BBB gt gt gt e ERRE gt e e la mi nio mw a gs VEMM Ww viiiiiM tm 19 2 2 25 x wrEEIEIFIEI v ze MAMM e Pee UII YI Vv Iv HEXESENERERNELEAERNE 10 11 ps as d as 16 gt b eb e BEREE e gt gt gt e BEREE L gt gt gt ERE bbb biblblblblbls gt e gt blblblblb s gt gt e e BRE Bo b i PBIB Re gt e e 5 AARRE 2 5 e 5 BEB s bbb 2 BIBI Be gt e blblblblb s gt e 5 5 Bil 2 bbb gt RIERA MS SS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 23 4 2 9 ng a a amp ROS 22 nioj aml al BS a S R S ABS a 23 aoa B5 28 21 18 Apply Cancel 97 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Figure 60 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Apply Port isolation y Setting Wizard Incoming 22 23 24 25 21 16 E a m a e a a 2 Ei m a BIR A AS ALB A BLA SERE AS Bic oe cic BD A AS SAA 8 a AS SAA A AS AA Aaanu Ss AS e AS A AO AAA OA DD oe oo AA O Sa OS A AS AA Bb a AS A Boi A SA a a A AS oo clo a aa S a AS A a a a S a AS OO a aa a a AS aaa a a E a a aa a oo Jaaa ASA a a a E AS Jaaa AAE a a a a ccoo AAA E q Ss a E a a a aa ccs S m AS a a a a E SSE A cD ES e e A be oo oD o ciclo oO DDE cic a a ja aoa m n ee em ow Bas 2225253552 a aM r E z nip
81. in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remo
82. labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN consists of up to 64 printable characters LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power
83. left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 8 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter 9 8 1 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type I P VLAN 4 Sel
84. link takes you to a screen where you can set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs Advanced Application GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port Forwarding These static MAC addresses do not age out Static Multicast Forwarding This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC addresses for port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree Protocol This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP MSTP to prevent network loops Bandwidth Control This link takes you to a screen where you can configure bandwidth limits on the Switch Broadcast Storm Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first po
85. nearby electric outlet to power up devices Figure 46 Powered Device Examples You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs Note The GS2200 8HP complies with the IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet PoE standard and the GS2200 24P complies with the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard Ports 1 to 4 on the GS2200 8HP can supply power of up to 30W per Ethernet port Ports 5 to 8 on the GS2200 8HP and ports 1 to 24 on the GS2200 24P can supply power of up to 15 4W per Ethernet port Note The GS2200 24P is compatible with ZyXEL s PPS250 power module The PPS250 provides additional external PoE power budget on top of the internal power budget of the GS2200 24P Refer to the User s Guide of the PPS250 for more information Note The PoE Power over Ethernet devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors The Switch is to be connected only to PoE networks without routing to the outside plant Note The RPS connector port at the back panel of the GS2200 24P and RPS connector cable should only be used with the PPS250 Do not insert other connector cables to the RPS connector port of the GS2200 24P or the PPS250 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 78 To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch click Basic Setting gt PoE Figure 47 Basic Setting gt PoE Status a JEFE P
86. number Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Note When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security settings for a port you cannot include the port in an active trunk group Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 4 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Dynamic Link Aggregation on page 137 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol d Link Aggregation Setting Active System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 O T2 v T3 O T4 O T5 O T6 O T7 O T8 O Port LACP Timeout a 30 M seconds 1 30 seconds 2 30 seconds 3 30 Y seconds E 30 v seconds 5 30 v seconds 6 30 Y seconds 7 30 1 secon The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt
87. of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EB Chapter 9 VLAN untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Internet D isl Figure 55 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example Tagged Frames Untagged Frames 192 168 1 0 24 10 1 1 0 24 VID 200 VID 300 9 5 1 Configuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Note Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Note You can not enable subnet based VLANs on the Switch when the Guest VLAN feature is activated on a port
88. of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Note The poe and fanspeed options are only available in the GS2200 8HP and GS2200 24P Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 35 3 2 Configuring SNMP User From the SNMP screen click User to view the screen as shown Use the User screen to create SNMP users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups An SNMP user is an SNMP manager Figure 174 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User User Information SNMP Setting Username Security Level noauth Authentication MD5 Password Privacy DES v Password Group admin v Add Cancel Clear Index Username SecurityLevel Authentication Privacy Group Delete 1 admin noauth MD5 DES admin L1 Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 Management
89. or straight ports so crossover cables can connect both computers and switches hubs 3 2 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic or even copper cable connectors To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed GS2200 8 8HP 100 Megabit per second Mbps or 1 Gigabit per second Gbps GS2200 24 24P 1 Gigabit per second Gbps 3 2 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Close the transceiver s latch latch styles vary GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Panels 5 Connect the fiber op
90. out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting gt General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 42 Basic Setting gt General Setup CT GeneralSetup System Name Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup None Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Time oo 56 TN New Time hh mm ss oo 6 faz Current Date razo for for New Date yyyy mm dd razo m E or Time Zone UTC y Daylight Saving Time rH Start Date January Y at 0 00 gt End Date of Januan Yi at 0 00 gt It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of u
91. port if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Rate Limit pkt Enter a number from 0 to 256 to specify how many control packets this port can receive or S transmit per second O means no rate limit You can configure the action that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded See Section 29 4 on page 233 for detailed information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 4 Error Disable Detect Configuration Use this screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 149 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect Errdisable Detect J Errdisable Cause Active Mode nacMepot Y ARP O inaclive port Y BPDU O inactive port v IGMP O inactive pot v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect LABEL
92. result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 132 DHCP Snooping Database File Format lt initial checksum gt TYPE DHCP SNOOP ING VERSION 1 BEGIN lt binding 1 gt lt checksum 1 gt lt binding 2 gt lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt lt checksum 1 2 n gt END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored 25 10 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stor
93. servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 162 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs h DHCP 192 168 1 100 VLAN 1 nid Es VLAN2 E DHCP 172 23 10 100 AA E LI For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 163 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example c OMNES VID 2 Remote DHCP Server 1 1 72 23 10 100 E Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 i Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information oO Option 82 Information O as2200 24 VID Type DHCP Status Delete Relay 192 168 1 100 a I gt GS2200 8 24 User s Guide ARP Learning 33 1 ARP Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 33 1 1 What You Can Do Use the ARP Learning screen Section 33 2 on page 252 to configure ARP lear
94. settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 78 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 25 10 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter 25 10 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers
95. skip this step 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the default IP address See Section 4 6 on page 45 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 42 Troubleshooting 6 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled logins for HTTP or Telnet If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details 3 Disconnect and re connect the cord to the Switch 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 45 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled
96. so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 54 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting A ORAM Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP O Ingress Check o Port PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation o All Y O O 1 1 O All O O 2 Y O Al O o 3 Y O AN M O O 4 Po O AO o M o i 5 1 O All x O O 6 1 O All O O 7 1 O All v 1 O 8 1 O EN Y 1 O g 1 o All v O O 10 1 O All Y O ui Al Y E E Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting
97. t pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 12 on page 107 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 213 Chapter 25 IP Source Guard 25 10 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of t
98. the Switch Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP a Spanning Iree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second D 0 Max Age second D D Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time second Max Age second This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge
99. the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note If DHCP is enabled and there are no trusted ports DHCP requests will not succeed DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 25 5 2 on page 203 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or IP address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 70 DHCP Snooping Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Writ
100. the Switch HTTPS server a This Connection is Unstructed screen may display If that is the case click I Understand the Risks and then the Add Exception button Figure 186 Security Alert Mozilla Firefox 7 Untrusted Connection Mozilla Firefox Elle Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help c C X https 192 168 1 1 LA Most Visited i3 Getting Started Latest Headlines 4 Untrusted Connection 28 Googe This Connection is Untrusted You have asked Firefox to connect securely to 192 168 1 1 but we can t confirm that your connection is secure Normally when you try to connect securely sites will present trusted identification to prove that you are going to the right place However this site s identity can t be verified What Should Do If you usually connect to this site without problems this error could mean that someone is trying to impersonate the site and you shouldn t continue Get me out of here Technical Details Understand the ks If you understand what s going on you can tell Firefox to start trusting this site s identification Even if you trust the site this error could mean that someone is tampering with your connection Don t add an exception unless you know there s a good reason why this site doesn t use trusted identification Add Exception GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Confirm the HTTPS server URL matches Click Confirm
101. the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA Table 62 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADI US server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting serve
102. to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from t
103. to Section 20 3 on page 158 Figure 101 Policy Example Active Name Classifier s Parameters Action Test Example General VLAN ID Egress Port 1 K Priority 0 j Forwarding No change O Discard the packet Priority No change O Setthe packet s 802 1 priority Outgoing CI Send the packetto the egress port O Set the packet s VLAN ID te Limit v Enable Bandwidth Rate Limit 10000 Kbps GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Queuing Method 22 1 Overview This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information 22 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Queueing Method screen Section 22 2 on page 166 set priorities for the queues of the Switch This distributes bandwidth across the different traffic queues 22 1 2 What You Need to Know Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Strictly Priority Queuing Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted fi
104. up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored b
105. uploading to the device Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device Click Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade to view the screen as shown next Figure 168 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade g Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location ofthe binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse C Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System I nfo screen to verify your current firmware version number GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 257 Chapter 34 Maintenance 34 4 Restore a Configuration File Use this screen to restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch Figure 169 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration a Restore Configuration Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configur
106. 0 8001 000000000000 Internal Cost 0 0 Port ID Ox0000 Ox0000 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration second message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is second listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 36 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL D
107. 00 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from GMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs
108. 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic Figure 111 MVR Configuration Example i r News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 i ERAN Multicast VID 200 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 1 1 i 1 1 1 i 1 1 Se bz A B ger x LI i ZEN ijs H 1 Mie Lord GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 179 Chapter 23 Multicast To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 112 MVR Configuration Example AGED Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active v Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 200 802 1p Priority Mode amp Dynamic C Compatible 1 e 10 C D 2 O ol C r3 3 e s O 1 B C Q G 1 7 e C C lv 8 C o 1 9 O e 1 10 C C G o 11 c C G O PAPA A AL ION ISS LSS lie ta OO Oar 25 C C G o 26 O O G r 27 c C G n 28 O G o 180 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 113 MVR Group Configuration E
109. 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 poe PwrPortFailedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the port is turned off to supply power due to overloading over system buget or short circuit PwrPortFailedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the port returns to the normal state and has the ability to supply power PsePwrFailedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the power supply of POE failed The trigger situation includes internal external power supply failure external fan speed failure and external power has exceed normal temperature PsePwrFailedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the power supply of PoE returns to the normal state GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 273 Chapter 35 Access Control Table 113 SNMP InterfaceTraps e OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 P 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8
110. 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 36 2 2 MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 107 70 2 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 107 70 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 107 70 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 107 70 2 mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 This trap is sent when more than 99 of the MAC table is used 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 This trap is sent when less than 9596 of the MAC table is used 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold CFM dotlagCfmFaultAlarm 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 0 1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a connectivity fault 276 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 35 7 2 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 179 SSH Communication Example Nm SSH Server SSH Client 35 7 2 1 How SSH
111. 20 1 Overview This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch It also discusses Quality of Service QoS and classifier concepts as employed by the Switch 20 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Classifier screen Section 20 2 on page 154 to define the classifiers and view a summary of the classifier configuration After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules 20 1 2 What You Need to Know Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Configure policy rules to define action
112. 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 6 1 Management IP Addresses The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s Note You must configure a VLAN first Figure 44 Basic Setting gt IP Setup E IP Setup g Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management IP O DHCP Client Address Static IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VID 1 Apply Management IP Addresses IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 00 00 VID fo wt Default Gateway ooo Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete 1 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 2 0 0 0 0 O The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP Server address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Management IP Address GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 74 Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued
113. 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 5 Q al e C Fp dde 6 24 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 26 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 27 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 28 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Cancel Clear 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTaaging 2 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging VLAN Status Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging g M TxTagging v Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 35 Tutorial Click the VLAN Port Setting Link NBVENEIEUHNEND VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time 1 1 49 52 07 2 102 0 00 15 Previous Next Change Pages VLAN Port Setting Search Static VLAN Status Static Static 9 Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 57 Chapter 6 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 36 Tutorial Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2 PEN 8 ojo E Ai o m p 0 0 0 0O EI CO Nn Ch Un 4 CO e CEAN Por Setna d GVRP L1 Ingress Check O Port PVID GVRP O 9 9 C9
114. 4 User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table8 Status Port Details continued The following fi LABEL DESCRIPTION Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDI NG if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet elds display detailed information about packets transmitted The following fi Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Rx Packet elds display detailed information about packets received The following fi Unicast T
115. 5 Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are connected to DHCP clients Click Apply Figure 29 Tutorial Set the DHCP Server Port to Trusted LE DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Apply Cancel EN TTT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure gt VLAN show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID and End VID fields and click Apply Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system name you can also select the Option82 and Information fields in the entry See Section 25 10 1 3 on page 212 Figure 30 Tutorial Enable DHCP Snooping on this VLAN 3s nooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID fioo End VID fico VID Enabled Option82 Information a No ri ri 100 O O Apply Cancel 8 Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently 9 Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer as DHCP client to either port 6 or 7 The computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7 t
116. 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 D D 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 26 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 27 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 28 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Any Clear Counter C Por A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is the configuration of your Switch that stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT GS2200 8 24 Basic Setting Basic Setting Advanced Application Basic Setting Advanced Application Advanced Application IF Appl on 3 MENE UL Manageme VLAN Static Routing Maintenance Static MAC Forwarding DiffServ Access C
117. 5 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Defined in WT 101 SubOpt Length Value OxC Access Space eth Space Slot Port No VLAN Node ID ID Identifier 1 3 1 1 2 1 byte byte byte 1 byte byte byte 4 20 byte byte bytes 28 1 2 3 Port State Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agent This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection You can also specify the agent sub options circuit ID and remote ID that the Switch adds to PADI and PADR packets from PPPoE clients Trusted ports are connected to PPPoE servers f a PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPOE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports f a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPOE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE intermediate agent and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers f a PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switch discards
118. 8503 7003 500 Normal FAN2 7077 8503 6994 500 Normal FAN3 7124 8544 7003 500 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 05VIN 1 035 1 035 1 035 5 Normal 1 05VIN 1 031 1 031 1 031 5 Normal 3 3VIN 3 274 3 274 3 274 5 Normal The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes Product Model This field displays the product model of the Switch Use this information when searching for firmware upgrade or looking for other support information in the website ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the date Version created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch Address Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature BOARD MAC and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor
119. AA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 119 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup 188 EEC Authentication Type Privilege Enable Login Authorization Type Exec Dot1x Accounting Update Period Type System Exec Dotix Commands E Method 1 Method 3 local flocal Method 2 Active Method 1 radius y ri radius fo minutes Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege E O s radius gt m r start stop radius O O stop only tacacs o Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands See the CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADI US are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Metho
120. ACACS Server Setup screen Section 24 4 on page 186 to configure your TACACS authentication settings Use the AAA Setup screen Section 24 5 on page 188 to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch and specify which database the Switch should use first 24 1 2 What You Need to Know Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 34 on page 255 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by mean
121. ACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 24 6 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter 24 6 1 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privil
122. AN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Server 1 3 Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays the DHCP mode Relay DHCP Status For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 32 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP
123. Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to a screen where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to screens where you can configure clustering management and view Management its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to other ports GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen Figure 20 Change Administrator Login Password a Logins Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm 1 2 3 a EEE
124. Community string which is the password for the incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Trap Destination Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in the Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 35 3 1 Configuring SNMP Trap Group Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each
125. Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches using 1000Base T compatible Category 5 5e 6 copper cables e Two or four Mini GBIC Slots Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for connections to backbone Ethernet switches Console Port The console port is for local configuration of the Switch 3 2 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 Terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 2 2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports The Switch has 1000Base T auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet the speed can be 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 100 1000 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable Four 1000Base T Ethernet ports are paired with a mini GBIC slot to create a dual personality interface The Switch uses up to one connection for each mini GBIC and 1000Base T Ethernet pair Th
126. D DESCRIPTION Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MI Bs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON e SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 are specific to the GS2200 24 The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 are specific to the GS2200 24P The OIDs beginning with 1
127. E LANE a a a Ac 86 et LAN EAS asian aia TTE 87 EOS A ATLAS iia 88 G aniqgura VLAN Par Setas cuina A AE 90 US Spiet Based YLANG ra a A a 91 551 Comun Subnel Based de ac 92 cam sees Hnc SENI p nr 94 2 5 1 Gomipuring Protocol Based VLAN anat 94 Maxime OA VLAN Ecl A sora ads 96 Wea conige a POR DESSO VLAN 2 2 rade naa SUDO R add acid e bra Eat ens EA ante rere 97 SOTEN T aO nm m 99 8 5 1 Greats an IP based VLAN Example soso a rc OR ecc bc e x Qd a OR 99 Chapter 10 vhe MAG Forward A 101 IDEA anaa neret eee reer erat eee Serre terete reser en rer cee tect errr rete rene 101 ILT TWoA a DO M 101 T02 MUA Statie MAC FOME uisus li rock 101 Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup iii is is 103 DEBES 0 meer Em 103 WARS VOULU ATE DEL us assai poor ebd tabla Dn pte d agna ob hA enna bera aacra 103 DE NA TUNES TITON aee T 103 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EM Table of Contents 11 2 Goniquiing State Molicast Forwarding abiecta GRE ua ERR ho TUR peste Gao Po ERR aa Gt do 104 Chapter 12 o 9 107 ANE A rers 107 iaiT What You Cah DO Mem 107 prese pid a Fenno RU aa a SAE NEAS 107 Chapter 13 iilius X 109 o rc 109 TREE Nat TOG ERO usen Ft epo cp or Doce ocprudue taceo bread a ER eR Rd 109 13 12 Wal MEE TO ROW e E
128. E device even if the PoE device needs less than 20 W Port This is the port index number State This field shows which ports can receive power from the Switch You can set this in Section 8 8 1 on page 79 Disable The PD connected to this port cannot get power supply Enable The PD connected to this port can receive power GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 14 Basic Setting gt PoE Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Class This shows the IEEE 802 3af power classification of the PD This is a number from 0 to 4 where each value represents a range of power W and power current mA that the PD requires to function The ranges are as follows Class O Default 0 44 to 12 94 Class 1 Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Class 2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Class 3 Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Class 4 Reserved PSEs classify as Class 0 in a Switch that supports IEEE 802 3af only Optional 12 95 to 25 50 in a Switch that supports IEEE 802 3at PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority first Critical has the highest priority High has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical priority ports are served Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are serve
129. ESCRIPTION Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Internal Cost Port ID This is the path cost from the root port in this
130. ESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 95 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 31 3 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 156 P Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting PENES Diffserv DSCP to 802 1p Mapping o 0 v ifo 2J0 7 3 0 gt aoz s o gt e 0 v 7 o alt A 013 ul aia fil une sz t 2 127 ase 192 202 22 2227 cer afin 3x 23 zba zba 2035 cz abr alar alar aaa asar aja ara cef c4 4 s v aba eA sA o axo sz o sez vjz 4e 6 v sjem soem sidem sez sez sez sse 56 y 57 v se 7
131. GS2200 8 24 Series Intelligent Layer 2 GbE Switch User s Guide Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 Firmware Version 4 00 Edition 1 12 2011 ZyXEL Copyright O 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch using the web configurator Related Documentation Command Line Interface CLI Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the Switch Web Configurator Online Help The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Note It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan GS2200 8 24 User s Guide a About This User s Guide Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com SOLUTIONS PRODUCTS amp SERVICES SUPPORT TRAINING NEWS PARTNERS PRODUCT FINDER
132. HCP request 6 3 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure 1 Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 2 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch 3 You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 1 Overview This chapter describes the screens for system status web configurator home page port details and PoE status The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 7 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Port Status Summary screen Section 7 2 on page 61 to view the port statistics Use the Port Details screen Section 7 2 1 on page 63 to display individual port statistics GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 38 Status GS2200 24 a ETT Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time AL Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STO
133. Home Support Download Library em Download Library i Download Library Knowledge Base Support Feedback Warranty Information Forum Product Registration ZyXEL Windows 7 Support IEEE 802 11n Standard p as M a End User License Agreement Er a GPL OSS Software Notice Download Search Certification KARG Curzona Datasheet Declaration Driver Firmware MIBFile Quick Start Guide Product ALL v Software Support Note User s Guide Material Type ALL y Keyword Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office
134. MST instance to the regional root switch This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance 13 10 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 10 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 78 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANSs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 79 MSTP Network Example 13 10 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUS enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUS traverse the region GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 10 3 13 10 4 Devices that belong to the s
135. Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 6 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol For example port 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and port 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C
136. N intrusionlock IntrusionLockEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 errdisable errdisableDetect 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 130 4 This trap is sent when an error is detected 1 on a port such as a loop occurs or the rate limit for specific control packets is 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 130 4 exceeded 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 130 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 130 4 1 errdisableRecovery 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 130 4 This trap is sent when the Switch ceases 2 the action taken on a port such as shutting down the port or discarding 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 130 4 packets on the port after the specified 2 recovery interval 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 130 4 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 130 4 2 fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 range FanSpeedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the fan speed returns to the normal operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890
137. N on a specific port or for a specific port the Switch adds the user defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub option The variables can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client the port number of the PPPoE client and or the VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet The identifier string slot ID port number and VLAN ID are separated from each other by a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space An Agent Circuit ID Sub option example is Switch 07 0123 and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPOE client which is connected to the Switch s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123 Table 84 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Using Identifier String and Variables SubOpt Length Value Identifier delimiter Slot ID delimiter String delimiter VLAN ID 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes 53 byte WT 101 Default Circuit ID Syntax If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port and disable the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent screen the Switch automatically generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 28 PPPoE defined in the DSL Forum Working Text WT 101 The default access node identifier is the host name of the PPPoE intermediate agent and the eth indicates Ethernet Table 8
138. NS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 In the Internet Protocol there is a field called Protocol to identify the next level protocol The following table shows some common protocol types and the corresponding protocol number Refer to http www iana org assignments protocol numbers for a complete list Table 51 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers PROTOCOL TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER ICMP 1 TCP 6 UDP 17 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 157 Chapter 20 Classifier Table 51 Common IP Protocol Types and Protocol Numbers Some of the most common TCP and UDP port numbers are PROTOCOL TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER EGP 8 L2TP 115 Table 52 Common TCP and UDP Port Numbers PROTOCOL NAME TCP UDP PORT NUMBER FTP 21 Telnet 23 SMTP 25 DNS 53 HTTP 80 POP3 110 See Appendix B on page 317 for information on commonly used port numbers 20 3 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy in the Policy screen to define action s on the classified traffic flow Figure 98 Classifier Example Active Name Layer 2 Layer 3 O Classi er 7 Exam
139. Overview This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for out going traffic flows on a port 14 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Bandwidth Control screen Section 14 2 on page 130 to limit the bandwidth for traffic going through the Switch GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 14 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Figure 82 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control Port C ns ei we hy LE Bandwidth NN Active O Active Ingress Rate Active Egress Rate O i Kbps Nu Kbps 64 o keps O 64 um Tops O 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps O 64 Kops IF 64 Kops O 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps B4 Kbps O 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps O B4 Kbps O 64 Kbps 10 O 64 Kbps O 64 bps Ps a er ee NES SN wa o rl O 64 Kbps O 64 Kbps The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 37 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Active Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row fi
140. P Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 D 0 D 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ik Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Di ed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 STOP EE 0 0 Any O Pot j Figure 39 Status GS2200 24P a TEVE Port Name Link State PD LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time 1 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 T Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 INC ye OO Ee A A d own abled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Any Pun Clear Counter The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 40 on page 63 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basi
141. RP entries which contain the specified port number and add them in the IP source guard static binding table You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Select VLAN List and enter the VLAN ID s to create static bindings from previously learned ARP entries which contain the specified VLAN ID and add them in the IP source guard static binding table You can enter individual VLAN I Ds separated by a comma or a range of VLAN IDs by using a dash ARP Freeze Click ARP Freeze to create static bindings from previously learned ARP entries which match the specified criteria and display them in the lower part of the screen Static Binding MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC
142. Remote Management Click Here 35 3 Configuring SNMP Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings Click Management gt Access Control gt SNMP to view the screen as shown Figure 172 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP iuum Access Control Trap Group User General Setting Version v2c a Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version IP Port Username V2c w 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 V2c w 0 0 0 0 162 v2c w 0 0 0 0 162 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 262 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 105 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set
143. S servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA Table 63 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Server Use this section to config
144. Security Exception to proceed to the web configurator login screen Figure 187 Security Alert Mozilla Firefox Add Security Exception You are about to override how Firefox identifies this site A Legitimate banks stores and other public sites will not ask you to do this Server Location https 192 168 1 1 i Certificate Status This site attempts to identify itself with invalid information Wrong Site Certificate belongs to a different site which could indicate an identity theft Unknown Identity Certificate is not trusted because it hasn t been verified by a recognized authority EXAMPLE Permanently store this exception Confirm Security Exception Cancel 35 7 3 2 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar in Internet Explorer 6 or GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Mozilla Firefox or next to the address bar in Internet Explorer 7 or 8 denotes a secure connection Figure 188 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection 9 Web Configurator Mozilla Firefox Ele Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help I hitps 192 168 0 1 Most Visited Getting Started Al Latest Headlines L Web Configurator In Save Status El Logout B Help Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time Down STOP Disable
145. T T 109 19 2 Spanning Tos Protocol Stats SODA Lucien prs diner Perna ater eren a rci umbecnt aA awe 112 133 Spanning es TOCA NORD nn T aaa o aE E b A aaan Ei aA EIA 113 15 4 Donfigure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol rn aeioeaio 114 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tres Protocol Salsa 115 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ooooinnccccnincconnccccnoncccnnnancncnnnc cn ano cnn ranc cnn 117 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tres Protocol Status irc tie tetnetrant eene naaca Ebo Pucci spa raant 118 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol siii ic b ERR AR CURE Rte 120 13 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration sese 123 13 9 Mulible Spamming Tres Protocol SAUS a 123 TO TEn aA RaT E REI to S EEA 125 110i MSTP Nawo EXSIIDIG ii 126 TE WS ST Rei a a aa 126 LEN Leg nes ASAS ques 127 13 104 Common and Intemal Spanning Tree CEST inc 127 Chapter 14 Bandwidth B jj 129 bes IU ETT T D aude is Sadrauomataate 129 TELI AMA OU bet e ES 129 142 Bandeldih Cono Sel rai AAA 130 Chapter 15 A e joo BC 132 NER II Semet emm E 132 IRE YOU Cah DO ni 132 15 2 DISCS OS ri A 133 Chapter 16 A Ano PP POP O OO HA 134 TOMA e 134 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Table of Contents Uc mE Irure bc T 134 TEA PO A lanes Lr bcd ad ai pe dud d iuo as ud dust dl uda 135 Chapter 17 alque sion Oo
146. TER an ODER 294 38 4 1 Cluster Member Switch Management ssssssssssssssssssseeeeee eere tnnt ntn nnns 294 Chapter 39 cup PR 296 CONES 0 o 296 28 1 7 WBA WOE AA O 296 aute WB TOU NOS ICT Serene ne een nr eerie broerepe todo ai eenetrr ro des hy bono sie esu ao ree trr ree 296 noc views MAC TARD A Ru pr ea Eau Ra 297 Chapter 40 ARP dl mer 299 AN E ros TOES ea 209 101 1 What You Ca DO c 299 AAA see sdudurieasdacuureatstuuunvedanderss 299 A ett E T 299 Chapter 41 e 301 NES 0 We Y 301 zsEcl suicidio eec T 301 Chapter 42 Hiis M 303 42 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS aces rrt rk n ER ertt oh rr rd 303 EE SIE AAN L A MSN ect 304 poe Swie COnN aion isa A A 306 Chapter 43 xiii E 307 scq A Changing FUSE Tm 315 Appendix B oui ad D T mE 317 Appendix 4 Legal IMOrmatON siria paier An cep i ape Ee Rabe e beue Lebe Sda GE Ge aA Ea O E 321 Lj o 323 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide PART User s Guide Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 Introduction This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch The Switch is a layer 2 standalone Ethernet switch with addit
147. Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 35 7 3 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 278 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go
148. a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 106 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Filtering 12 1 Overview This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source and or destination MAC addresses and VLAN group ID 12 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Filtering screen Section 12 2 on page 107 to create rules for traffic going through the Switch 12 2 Configure a Filtering Rule Use this screen to create rules for traffic going through the Switch Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 67 Advanced Application gt Filtering LG Filtering_ Active O Name Discard source Action Discard destination MAC sb A E A E O E es p VID Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 107 Chapter 12 Filtering The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deletin
149. abels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Ports These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group The port number s displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging to this group Synchronized Ports These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Link Aggregation ID on page 138 for more information on this field The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled for this group Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk src mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source MAC address dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address src dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses src ip means the Switch distribut
150. able 93 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of Address your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Differentiated Services 31 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points wit
151. ack into the Switch until you hear a click 4 Plug the power cord back into the unit GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 315 Appendix A Changing a Fuse GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 132 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH IPSEC TUNNEL User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger servic
152. ack to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another PPPOE IA With the PPPoE Intermediate Agent enabled the Switch can give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client CPU Protection You can limit the rate of protocol control packets such as ARP BPDU and or I GMP to be delivered to the CPU on a port Error Disable You can set the Switch to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when the Switch detects a pre configured error You can also configure the Switch to automatically undo the action after the error is gone ARP Learning You can configure the Switch to update the ARP table with with an ARP reply or a gratuitous ARP request and or an APR request Table 130 Feature Specifications L2 Bridging 16K MAC addresses 4 way associative hashed Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control in 1 second interval 1 pps stepping Static MAC address forwarding port lock Switching Switching fabric 20 Gbps or 56 Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 9 K bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q
153. actory default settings Default Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Switch Configuration i Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch System a Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch 34 2 1 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 166 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer xj 2 Are you sure you want to load factory default i Cancel 3 In the web configurator click the Save button in the top of the screen to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 34 2 2 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings perman
154. age 183 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port Figure 90 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process SS T Q New Connection Identity Request Authentication Request Du Access Challenge Login Credentials Challenge Request Challenge Response Access Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the Auth and Acct Radius Server Setup screen Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen a
155. al network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Relay IGMP Snooping Use this feature to have the Switch forward DHCP requests to DHCP servers on your network The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion The following scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for pack
156. al port aggregation LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and manages trunk groups UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer s port it connected to monitor the physical status of a link Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and forward them to the tunnel port s Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Note You can enable L2PT services for STP LACP VTP CDP UDLD and PAGP on the access port s only Select Tunnel for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network The Switch decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by changing the destination MAC address to the original one and then forward them to an access port If the service s is not enabled on an access port the protocol packets are dropped Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide PPPoE 28 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview This chapter describes how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination serv
157. ame MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 80 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 1 Region 2 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 127 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 81 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 2 Region 3 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Bandwidth Control 14 1
158. amic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping database Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort timer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started
159. an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Multiple STP on page 112 for more information on MSTP GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Note This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 77 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP a XTEHnnrR cbr Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 Hello Time second 2 Max Age second 0 20 Forwarding Delay second 0 15 Cost to Bridge 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 Configuration Name 001349000002 Revision Number 0 Configuration Digest A317523DB32DA2D62 Topology Changed Times D Time Since Last Change 0 Instance Instance VLAN 0 1 4093 MSTI E y Bridge Regional Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 00000000000
160. ancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Click on an index number to view more details and edit an existing account Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for Level SNMP communication with this user Authenticati This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP communication with this on user Privacy This field displays the encryption method used for SNMP communication with this user Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 35 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Use this screen to assign which users can access the Switch via web configurator at any one time Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 A
161. anning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 13 1 on page 109 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol on page 110 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 71 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP a oN TIJCEIDLEInnBODCBIX 3CI I Status Active O Bridge Priority 32768 v Hello Time 2 Seconds MAX Age 20 Seconds Forwarding Delay 15 Seconds Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost A O O 1 O v 128 4 2 O v 128 4 3 O v 128 4 4 L v 128 4 5 O Y 128 4 6 iv 128 4 7 O 12 A o ea se idi i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt
162. are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not
163. ast Setting Group Configuration Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority fo Mode amp Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None y ri 1 a O 2 a Li 3 O O a ri 4 o C a ri Active O Name Add Cancel Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN ID Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustm
164. ation file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 34 5 Backup a Configuration File Use this screen to save and store your current device settings Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 170 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration LATIN Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 258 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance 34 6 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter 34 6 1 FTP Command Line Thi
165. ber to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 9 2 1 VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 52 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LE VLAN Detail VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 Elapsed Time Status 1 3 5 7 9 11915133 515 172487 21 23 25 27 U U U U U U U U U U U U U o 1 142 09 00 Static U U u U U U Uu U U U u U U The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port N
166. by default Java permissions enabled by default cannot see some of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels Adjust the value in your computer and then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet HTTP and SSH GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 42 Troubleshooting Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management gt Diagnostic screen to check for unauthorized access to your Switch To avoid unauthorized access configure the secured client setting in the Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management screen for telnet HTTP and SSH see Section 35 6 on page 268 Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch 42 3 Switch Configuration lost my configuration settings after restart the Switch Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory each time you make changes Click Save Save JA Status Fl Logout H Help at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently See also Section 34 5 on page 258 for more information about how to save your configuration GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware featur
167. c RT 194 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Table of Contents 25 5 IP Source Guard Sialic BUDE sous nnd ent dn ota opa Ed bcr egeta c ob ga dva 195 EDO DHEP S DIO ata a Fs ld edie dto 196 2 DHCP SM espeg un sz 199 EB DHOF npo POL D DUBODIEEE A as 201 25 592 DHCP Spp VLEAN COMDUEE usa 203 25 0 APP SOCIO SIUS ore 204 rwabscirctec eg VLAN STAG acre ET 205 eg B ARP eps cun Log OI NS sidad 206 208 SRP cre enses Du EET DL aires Galan dyin 207 2558 1 ARP IST POR COMME is sian cease sume Ex dur odit buses Hot SE ds exul abd Pant Gau Ae 208 25 8 2 ARP Inepecdon VLAN COmnllgulB mate 210 o Temi RICOS ania 211 25 AGA DH F Snooping Kv ci cie 211 25 30 2 ARP Inspection PM ecdesia tidie ence tp eencepuc Leni n bal senectus eas Ae cc cR netsh 213 Chapter 26 Loop GUANO 215 EREE i r Mm ECT rp Y 215 251 1 What You Can DO aisi teens iie oett i ues aac e entm Esdr Eme ee 215 202a vau INE ID TIS aaa as 215 202 Loop 21 1c e bp dada 217 Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol Ok at 219 CryEREC AAA TIR UT T 219 2213 Wal XOD EB D tai cobre bts Ete ud Rd ORE Eon de 219 271 2 WNA VOU Need TO KNOW M 219 27 2 Comiguing Layer 2 Protocal Tmel use erupit a rer gab eno a 221 Chapter 28 ldxdu e 223 25 1 PPPOE Intermediate Agent C YGPUNW 25s eios se toe FEDES n tX aid 223 cum Iu EE DB p A 223 28 1 2 What You SO TORTON aiias t
168. c Setting gt Port Setup screen GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table7 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This field displays the speed either 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDI NG if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP PD For GS2200 8HP or GS2200 24P only This field displays whether or not a powered device PD is allowed to receive power from the Switch on this port LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter t
169. ccess Control A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown next Figure 175 Management gt Access Control gt Logins Le Logins g Administrator Edit Logins 1 2 3 4 Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Login User Name Password Retype to confirm Access Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Pas
170. ch s web configurator Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 193 Management gt Cluster Management Status EE Clustering Management Status Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name Model Status 1 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 Online The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 122 Management gt Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following fields Member describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the I ndex column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 195 on page 294 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EM Chapter 38 Cluster Management
171. changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Error Disable 29 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port and set the Switch to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when the Switch detects a pre configured error It also shows you how to configure the Switch to automatically undo the action after the error is gone 29 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Errdisable screen Section 29 2 on page 232 to display the main Error Disable screen Use the CPU Protection screen Section 29 3 on page 232 to to limit the maximum number of control packets ARP BPDU and or IGMP that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port Use the Errdisable Detect screen Section 29 4 on page 233 to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded Use the Errdisable Recovery screen Section 29 5 on page 234 to set the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone 29 1 2 What You Need to Know Read on for concepts on Error Disable that can help you config
172. col attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 66 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Typ 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 24 6 2 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This appendix lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication This section lists the attributes used by authentication functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA 24 6 3 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 24 6 3 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privileg
173. control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 40 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table41 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 17 2 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 17 1 on page 137 for more information Figure 85 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Setting Group Enabled Synchronized Aggregator ID Criteria Status ID Ports Ports T1 5 6 src dst mac Static 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 T 2p 7 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000j S O SStHP LACP T3 src dst mac T4 src dst mac T5 src dst mac T6 src dst mac T7 src dst mac T8 src dst mac 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation The following table describes the l
174. d This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Multiple STP on page 112 for more information on MSTP Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP E Multiple Spanning Tree Protoco Port Status Bridge Active O Hello Time P E seconds MAX Age 120 seconds Forwarding Delay 115 seconds Maximu
175. d Consuming This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch on this Power mW port Max Power This field displays the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this mW port Max Current This field displays the maximum amount of current drawn by the PD from the Switch on this mA port 8 8 1 PoE Setup Use this screen to set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power to PDs GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 79 Chapter 8 Basic Setting Click the PoE Setup link in the Basic Setting PoE Status screen The following screen opens Figure 48 Basic Setting gt PoE gt PoE Setup ha he C ODO aD PoE Status C i x PoE Mode Classification Consumption Port PD PD Priority O Critical 1 Iv Low 2 Iv Critical 3 Iv Low 4 Iv Low 5 Iv Low 6 Iv Low Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Basic Setting gt PoE gt PoE Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use Classification Select this if you want the Switch to reserve the Max Power mW to each PD according to the power classification of the PD If the total power supply runs out PDs with lower priority do not get power to function Consumption Select this if you want the Switch to manage the total power supply so that each connecte
176. d A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100M for Fast Ethernet connections and 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 75 Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex Gigabit connections only Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are t
177. d e Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH e Dotlx Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA Table 64 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select e start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or T
178. d 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA Table 64 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select rad
179. d D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 0 0 0 442 6 03 46 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 289322 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 n alear Counter d Application ation Ko loo de den de de deo J no la la le lo d m 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 loo Copyright 1995 2011 by ZyXEL Communicat sb 9 a GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 36 1 Overview This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen perform port tests Use the Diagnostic screen Section 36 2 on page 285 to check system logs ping IP addresses or 36 2 Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests System Log IP Ping Ethernet Port Test Resolving 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful Figure 189 Manage
180. d PD gets a resource However the power allocated by the Switch may be less than the Max Power mW of the PD PDs with higher priority also get more power than those with lower priority levels Port This is the port index number PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port If left unchecked the PD connected to the port cannot receive power from the Switch PD Priority This field is only available on the PWR model but not available for the Gigabit or mini GBIC ports When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority Select Critical to give the highest PD priority on the port Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical priority ports are served Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are served GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 15 Basic Setting gt PoE gt PoE Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin c
181. d Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login 35 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Access Control screen Section 35 2 on page 261 to display the main screen Use the SNMP screen Section 35 3 on page 262 to configure your SNMP settings Use the Trap Group screen Section 35 3 1 on page 264 to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager Use the User Information screen Section 35 3 2 on page 265 to create SNMP users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups Use the Logins screens Section 35 4 on page 266 to assign which users can access the Switch via web configurator at any one time Use the Service Access Control screen Section 35 5 on page 268 to decide what services you may use to access the Switch Use the Remote Management screen Section 35 6 on page 268 to specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch 35 2 The Access Control Main Screen Use this screen to display the main screen GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 171 Management gt Access Control a Access Control g SNMP Click Here Logins Click Here Serice Access Control Click Here
182. d in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Ins
183. de whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID 9 2 VLAN Status Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 51 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Index 1 Change Pages VLAN Status g VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of YLAN 1 VID Elapsed Time Status 1 0 52 21 Static Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Search by Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma and click Search to display VID only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch The Number of VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch The Number of Search Results Index This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs This is the VLAN index number Click on an index num
184. destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Switch Access and Login Switch Configuration 42 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor The ALM LED is on 1 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch 2 If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 3 on page 36 2 Check the hardware connections See Section 42 1 on page 303 3 I
185. djustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Click Cancel to reset the fields GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Mirroring 16 1 Overview This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference 16 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Mirroring screen Section 16 2 on page 135 to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring 16 2 Port Mirroring Setup Click Advanced Application Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this sc
186. dwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 64 and 1000000 Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Note You can specify only one action pair in a policy rule To have the Switch take multiple actions on the same traffic flow you need to define multiple classifiers with the same criteria and apply different policy rules Say you have several classifiers that identify the same traffic flow and you specify a different policy rule for each If their policy actions conflict Discard the packet Send the packet to the egress port and Rate Limit the Switch only applies the policy rules with the Discard the packet and Send the packet to the egress port actions depending on the classifier names The longer the classifier name the higher the classifier priority If two classifier names are the same length the bigger the character the higher the classifier priority The lowercase letters such as a and b have higher priority than the capitals such as A and B in the classifier name For example the classifier with the name of class 2 class a or class B takes priority over the classifier with the name of class 1 or class A Let s say you set two classifiers Class 1 and Class 2 and both identify all traffic from MAC address 11 22 33 44 55 66 on port 3 If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to drop the packets Policy 2 applies to Class 2 and the acti
187. e A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 16 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 16 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology continued VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Administrative Control Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untag
188. e It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be TCP 21 possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 317 Appendix B Common Services Table 132 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Intern
189. e Access User Name The format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS 1P Address 24 6 3 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS 1P Address 24 6 3 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator GS2200 8 24 User s Guide IP Source Guard 25 1 Overview Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet 25 1 1 What You Can Do Use the IP Source Guard screen Section 25 2 on page 194 to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Use the IP Source Guard Static Binding screen Section 25 3 on page 195 to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Use the DHCP Snoop
190. e EI e E DE LI MM ia 244 32 1 1 Whal WO DO REI 244 ae 1 What You Need TO KNOW ri eros 244 oe ORA SII a N A PURI ER HITS 245 225 5 Donfiguring BHOP Global Relay ara 246 38 3 1 Global DHCF Relay Configuration EXamplge cis 247 324 Connguring DROP VLAN SSUMES ri tavisnieran ited sbendnntr a E aiaa aA ai a 247 32 4 1 Example DHCP Relay Ter Two VLANS diri 248 Chapter 33 ARP Learnie Ear A AAA RARA RA AAA AIBR 250 CLE A TED TP T 250 Sahl Npa Oa DE noa 250 ao 1 2 What You Need To KNOW ii iaa 250 sot dV ARF CEAN aia oral dad e 252 Chapter 34 Mam an ann iii 255 34 1 Overview GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Table of Contents ZEE M Vt YO CIE EIE uut e DERE EE a ED P af reef ERE CER ER E rc UST Ape 255 34 2 The Maintenance E hic POSTE UMP 255 24 2 1 Load Factory Dota std 256 241252 2HV8 COMU aa ebbe ubt a ep ER best b epic resa db P arp Ro PO EcL E ys ea 256 mq o PULS BIB qaecsnidt otiad date a reser re rer OM eera SN T E tec dante beduuutu pod tte tre 257 com Frimware Upgrade 257 15 Restore Ge COC SUO FIE ici ar orca adr oai ic cum drca adn fla dicas d 258 245 BuchRUp a GODIIJUEHIBA FIE ardid 258 24065 Technical REE scaena Ra a bb e nd PET D REOR Rp D RM Rn pd DO e RED 259 346 1 FIP Command LIB o 259 e i a 259 24 69 FIP Command Line Proceduro uunc ett trata p ERA CREE eer Ee an t Pis 259 24 6 4 GUFbased FTP Cenis EET RE So o SURE 260 uu b D PIS MOSES ansquicsteaedbeie
191. e delay interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 25 4 on page 196 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 25 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Note If DHCP snooping is enabled but there are no trusted ports DHCP requests cannot reach the DHCP server GS2200 8 24 User s
192. e maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port 15 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Broadcast Storm Control screen Section 15 2 on page 133 to limit the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 132 Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control 15 2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control ONSCECDEUGETCHDESUNLUI Active C mAr ERAO Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s TII TIT TUI Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make a
193. e mini GBIC slots have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC slot and the corresponding GbE port are connected at the same time the GbE port will be disabled Note The dual personality ports change to fiber mode directly when inserting the fiber module When auto negotiation is turned on an Ethernet port negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Panels signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect 3 2 2 1 Default Ethernet Negotiation Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Gigabit ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off Link Aggregation Disabled 3 2 2 2 Auto crossover All ports are auto crossover that is auto MDIX ports Media Dependent Interface Crossover so you may use either a straight through Ethernet cable or crossover Ethernet cable for all Gigabit port connections Auto crossover ports automatically sense whether they need to function as crossover
194. e screen See Section 25 5 on page 199 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 208 Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 72 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 25 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 126 ARP Inspection Status OF Rann VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPS Total number of filters 0 Index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete a O Delete Cancel Change Pages Previous Page Next Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of This field displays the current number of
195. earn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile mem
196. ecause the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 69 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read counters bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port
197. ect the protocol Leave the default value I P 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 6 Leave the priority set to O and click Add Figure 61 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example LE Protocol Based VLAN g Active v Port fi Name IP VLAN e iP e Others Hex VID B o 7 Priority D y Ethernet type Vlan Port Setting Ada Cancel index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add Click Add GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 10 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Static MAC Forwarding screen Section 10 2 on page 101 to assign static MAC addresses for a port 10 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may red
198. ection 8 3 on page 69 to configure general settings such as the system name and time Use the Switch Setup screen Section 8 5 on page 71 to choose your VLAN type set the ARP aging time and GARP timers and assign priorities to queues Use the IP Setup screen Section 8 6 1 on page 73 to configure the Switch IP address default gateway device the default domain name server and the management VLAN ID Use the Port Setup screen Section 8 7 on page 75 to configure Switch port settings Use the PoE Status screen Section 8 8 on page 76 to view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch and use the PoE Setup screen Section 8 8 1 on page 79 to set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power to PDs These screens are available to GS2200 8HP and GS2200 24P only GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number Figure 41 Basic Setting gt System Info a xiu c System Name GS2200 Product Model GS2200 24 ZyNOS FW Version V4 00 BPN 0 b2 10 05 2011 Ethernet Address 00 23 f8 37 dd ff Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status BOARD 31 0 31 0 29 0 85 0 Normal MAC 35 0 36 0 32 0 85 0 Normal PHY 34 0 34 0 31 0 85 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 7068
199. ed LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Group Num Enter the number 0 255 of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Profile Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or Mode server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP quer
200. ed in an Agent I nformation field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames See Chapter 32 on page 244 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 32 on page 244 212 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard 25 10 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping 25 10 2 25 10 2 1 Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second Configure static bindings ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 133 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things t pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B
201. eds a static route to tell it to use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2 Figure 151 Static Routing Overview 30 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Static Routing screen Section 30 2 on page 238 to activate deactivate this static route GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 237 Chapter 30 Static Route 30 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 152 P Application gt Static Routing a H ci Active Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Metric Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Metric Delete 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 192 158 1 2 F 3 Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route 1 Yes Example Table 93 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Address IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255
202. eeeeseneseaeeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseneeeeeseeeaes 27 E MST STORY cnan iia 27 2 2 Desktop Installation Procedure sisi cti 27 22 Muning the QUOI DAA AO corta cd aaa edat nbn OD Fiona eaa panca a ar 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation FtequiPermiBITis ascii 27 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 28 23 2 Mounting he Swich on A PIBOR cat A lia 29 2 40 Wal Mounting for CS OU IBI orcos 29 Chapter 3 Hardware Paneles exsninaa in nt da ARRA MARKER MR FETA ARABES RAEREAR AR 31 a O USER Re UHR I 31 d PB PANES iaa daa 31 kie POT 33 Ae Sara ESTEE POPIS vs o sa 33 1 RIE Sl qM d 34 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Table of Contents A sls T tenia 25 caza e e cce em Eee rU 36 Part IE Technical Heferencs 0 and 37 Chapter 4 A AA A 39 A IN tan 39 Ae VT LODI ER dab d a dabat bat a dap P eda aaa E 39 2 MESA AO rr as oo ad 40 tad Change YOU Paso wod sisselstnetecaedeairadeen tienes tie ace eect ac ee eee ein ecatt 44 2 4 Sui Yalr COMITE 3 eee air A sa coe re A Tyr i 44 Z5 NI LOE OMIT doudou 0 O ieits utc pee e ide potu GE E Hue a MM UU iiit p RR ONU HU VAM RE Op Lo itm unUn 44 Li rc c upegucPergogM rr aa E E 45 20 1 Rolbad mue Don OH File aia a 45 4 7 Loggiig Out oi the Wep Conigurator bc ETUR 46 AS F ria 46 Chapter 5 Dic Semp A aia ah ce aka Ca lea Nh hee ae hha 47 Sl ORO lada 47 ELA IAS VLAN MU 47 IES lr e oo 48 5 2 Cantiguing Switch Manageme
203. ege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server 190 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 65 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from O to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 24 6 1 1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel proto
204. eived on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a VLAN on a port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt I ntermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 28 3 2
205. el to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Introduction to VLANs 70 A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 9 on page 83 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 8 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting gt Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the
206. emote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Appendix B Common Services Table 132 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rathe
207. ent than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 34 6 3 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 103 on page 259 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 34 6 4 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type A
208. ently to Configuration 1 on the Switch Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch 256 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance 34 2 3 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 167 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 34 3 Firmware Upgrade Use the following screen to upgrade your Switch to the latest firmware Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before
209. ents on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 177 Chapter 23 Multicast Table 59 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s
210. er additional information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPOE client A PPPoE Intermediate Agent PPPoE IA is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients It helps the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific information to PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per port or per port per VLAN basis before forwarding them to the PPPoE server PPPoE Client PPPoE Server PPPOE IA bo 28 1 1 What You Can Do Use the PPPoE screen Section 28 2 on page 225 to display the main PPPoE screen Use the Intermediate Agent screen Section 28 3 on page 226 to enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch Use the PPPoE Per Port screen Section 28 3 1 on page 227 to set the port state and configure PPPOE intermediate agent sub options on a per port basis Use the PPPoE Per Port Per VLAN screen Section 28 3 2 on page 228 to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port Use the PPPoE for VLAN screen Section 28 3 3 on page 230 to enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN 28 1 2 What You Need to Know Read on for concepts on ARP that can help you configure the screen in this chapter 28 1 2 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization and PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients Thi
211. er of possible VIDs 84 priority frame 83 VID VLAN Identifier 83 VLAN 70 acceptable frame type 91 automatic registration 84 ID 83 IGMP snooping 169 ingress filtering 90 introduction 70 83 number of VLANs 86 port number 87 port settings 90 port based VLAN 96 port based all connected 99 port based isolation 99 port based wizard 99 PVID 91 static VLAN 88 status 86 87 subnet based 91 tagged 83 trunking 85 91 type 71 85 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 70 VLAN ID 74 VLAN Trunking Protocol see VTP VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN 94 VSA 190 VT100 33 VTP 222 W wall mounting 29 warranty 322 note 322 web configurator 39 getting help 46 home 40 login 39 logout 46 navigation panel 41 weight queuing 166 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 166 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 165 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Index Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 259 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Index 332 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide
212. eres ds 223 zug Se zi s iei eee cae headend ate 225 en PPPOE Mea AOBDIE dogs deae Miva aestan Re maet Br Eo 226 cos Fae Ole DS PO FON iaa aia 227 28 3 2 PPPOE lA Per Por Par VIRI eic satcxsuse pte tux e epe n ER peu SAA 228 25032 PERDER VLAN ai qubd pce dra a OS 230 Chapter 29 Error Disable AO O 90 MM M 231 MES 0 v M 231 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Table of Contents Rr WU los diti Rr MAMA RNC 231 291 2 What You Need TO KNOW issue ice ndn cnet arnes 231 292 Thus Enor Disable O tada 232 29 2 GPU Frotecion CONTIENT ii 232 29 4 Eitor Disable Detect Coniguration ui s 233 29 5 Emor Disable Recovery DOnBOQU BEIDE sii iria 234 Chapter 30 enren en A e o ROLE RISE HER TEEIRTIRIRA SERERE TENE AEA EA Ee MEER IEEE KEEN YE FERA SUPE M TRIER RU OK A 237 KCN ET UT TREE T te 237 CUR ESTIS CITIES SIE BEN ITERUM 237 30 2 Congr Statie Rouling sra deinen Gua VERE doo UO eb ERG BH PR a Rc 238 Chapter 31 Differentiated ServiGBS occ ose uites Nc deanIcS M ian eaea a RENE RN ND TCR ME RCM NM UE RP SM C DI D DM CIS CC MSN CEDE 240 HN i r NET UTE 240 xs emu ri o Res In Bro ERN RR RR A C ERUNT UR TRU RE 240 31 1 2 What You Need TO KNOW a 240 312 ACI P n Me 241 21 2 D3SOPdpIEBE 302 p Priority stas as pendere a di cert ese p nd dis 242 akai Comigunmo DSCP Senge ee E 242 Chapter 32 DRG P ora 244 Se DHCP OVSINI ni
213. ermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id A e n A t Untrusted ntrusted Y ntrusted ntrusted ntrusted v U U U U Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted U ntrusted Y Untrusted Apply Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 227 Chapter 28 PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number 7 Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Server Trusted Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted State Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers e Ifa PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports e Ifa PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Untrusted ports are downlink ports connected to subscribers e Ifa PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and rec
214. ernet EEE Safety UL 60950 1 GS2200 8 8HP only CSA 60950 1 GS2200 24 24P only CNS 14336 1 GS2200 8 8HP only EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A CNS 13438 GS2200 8 8HP only GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 43 Product Specifications GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Changing a Fuse This appendix shows you how to remove and install fuses for the Switch If you use a fuse other than an included fuse make sure it matches the fuse specifications in the chapter on product specifications Removing a Fuse Disconnect all power from the Switch before you begin this procedure 1 Remove the power cord from the Switch 2 See the product specifications for the location of the fuse Use a small flat head screwdriver to carefully pry out the fuse housing 3 Aburnt out fuse is blackened darkened or cloudy inside its glass casing A working fuse has a completely clear glass casing Pull gently but firmly to remove the burnt out fuse from the fuse housing Dispose of the burnt out fuse properly Installing a Fuse 1 The Switch is shipped from the factory with one spare fuse included in a box like section of the fuse housing Push the middle part of the box like section to access the spare fuse Put another spare fuse in its place in order to always have one on hand 2 Push the replacement fuse into the fuse housing until you hear a click 3 Push the fuse housing b
215. es Table 128 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Desktop design e GS2200 8 250 148 44 5 mm e GS2200 8HP 330 230 44 5 mm 1U and standard 19 rack mountable e GS2200 24 440 173 44 mm e GS2200 24P 440 310 44 mm Weight GS2200 8 1 34 Kg GS2200 8HP 2 66 Kg GS2200 24 2 5 Kg GS2200 24P 4 75 Kg Power Specification Power Rating GS2200 8 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 0 3A max GS2200 8HP 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 2 4A max GS2200 24 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 0 5A max GS2200 24P 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 2 5A max Power Consumption GS2200 8 12 3 Watt max GS2200 8HP 230 Watt max GS2200 24 31 W max GS2200 24P 268 W max GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 307 Chapter 43 Product Specifications Table 128 Hardware Specifications Interfaces GS2200 8 8 100 1000BASE T GS2200 8HP 8 100 1000BASE T PoE GS2200 24 24 100 1000BASE T GS2200 24P 24 100 1000BASE T PoE 2 or 4 GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each interface has one 1000Base T RJ 45 port and one Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP slot with one port active at a time Note The ports change to fiber mode directly when inserting the fiber module Auto negotiation Auto MDI X One console port Compliant with IEEE 802 3 3u 3ab Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x LEDs Per switch PWR SYS ALM GS2200 8 Per GE Ethernet RJ 45 100 1000 port LNK ACT
216. es the labels in this screen Table 119 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Logging Type Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 37 Syslog 37 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to view the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers Figure 191 Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup eA OXSH ODEINTTEITISTONMNNNE Syslog Setup Active r Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level y Ada Cancel Clear Index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 120 Manage
217. es traffic based on the packet s source IP address dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination IP address src dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group e LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 3 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 17 1 on page 137 for more information on link aggregation Figure 86 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting E Lin regation Settin Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria T1 v src dst mac T2 v src dstip 6 T3 a src dst mac M T4 a src dst mac T5 F src dst mac v T6 src dst mac M du src dst mac T8 C src dst mac vl Port Group 1 None 2 T2 vw 3 None Iv 4 None v 5 31 v 6 Tm e NMEMEM T a a a cai No The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This is the only screen you need to configure to enable s
218. ess Port Forwarding C Discard the packet Send the packetto the egress port Enable General Rate Limit Bandwidth 64 Kbps ange ange e packet s 802 1 priority e packet s VLAN ID it Add Cancel Clear Name Classifier s Delete Delete Cancel The following ta ble describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields bel ow for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port Priority Specify a priority level GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 53 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate Limit You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is dropped Ban
219. et Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 R
220. ets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table8 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1518 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1519 octets and the maximum frame size The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch model See Chapter 43 on page 307 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Basic Setting 8 1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup and PoE screens 8 1 1 What You Can Do Use the System Info screen Section 8 2 on page 67 to check the firmware version number Use the General Setup screen S
221. ets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Bandwidth Control Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes allow the Switch to communicate with management stations not reachable via the default gateway STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol M R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other M R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one
222. ew mapping information In Gratuitous ARP learning mode the Switch updates its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a gratuitous ARP request ARP Request When the Switch is in ARP Request learning mode it updates the ARP table with both ARP replies gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Chapter 33 ARP Learning Therefore in the following example the Switch can learn host A s MAC address from the ARP request sent by host A The Switch then forwards host B s ICMP reply to host A right after getting host B s MAC address and ICMP reply m D om A Nee ARP Request ARP Reply I CMP Request I CMP Reply ARP Request ARP Reply I CMP Request ICMP Reply 33 2 Configuring ARP Learning Click IP Application gt ARP Learning in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 164 IP Application gt ARP Learning Port 49 09 NiO As 4 WH ES 3 0 ED ARP Learning d ARP Learning Mode ARPRepy w PARE Resy v ply ARP Reply GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 33 ARP Learning The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 101 IP Application gt ARP Learning LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same f
223. ex This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port where the above MAC address is forwarded Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen GS2200 8 24 User s Guide ARP Table 40 1 Overview This chapter introduces ARP Table Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 40 1 1 What You Can Do Use the ARP Table screen Section 40 2 on page 299 to view IP to MAC address mapping s 40 1 2 What You Need to Know When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of t
224. f the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Canc
225. g it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only Action Select Discard source to drop the frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop the frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC Address This field dis
226. g screen Section 17 3 on page 140 to configure to enable static link aggregation Use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol screen Section 17 4 on page 142 to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP 17 1 2 What You Need to Know The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation Note In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 17 5 1 on page 143 for a static port trunking example Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The IEEE 802 3ad standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for dynamically creating and managing trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 137 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow
227. g this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Cluster Management 38 1 Overview This chapter introduces cluster management Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 121 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster 24 members Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Figure 192 Clustering Application Example BEE BEBE BEEP GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management 38 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Cluster Management screen Section 38 2 on page 291 to view the role of the Switch within the cluster and to access a cluster member switch s web configurator Use the Clustering Management Configuration screen Section 38 1 on page 290 to configure clustering management 38 2 Cluster Management Status Use this screen to view the role of the Switch within the cluster and to access a cluster member swit
228. ged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 9 1 2 2 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 49 Port VLAN Trunking c F N a N D vi v2 9 1 2 3 Select the VLAN Type YA E v1 v2 Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Figure 50 Switch Setup gt Select VLAN Type a DETONANTE 9 802 10 VLAN Type O Port zl GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to deci
229. ghts Hybrid This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR SPQ Lowest Select a queue QO to Q7 to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after Queue and including the specified queue for the port For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using SPQ Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 167 Multicast 23 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 23 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Multicast Status screen Section 23 2 on page 170 to view multicast group information Use the Mult
230. gnated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number T Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immed
231. gress incoming and Both GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring Table 39 Advanced Application gt Mirroring continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these Apply changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 136 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 17 Link Aggregation 17 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group 17 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Link Aggregation Status screen Section 17 2 on page 138 to view ports you have configured to be in the trunk group ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in the trunk group and so on Use the Link Aggregation Settin
232. gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User LABEL DESCRIPTION ad Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this screen to Information create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 107 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User continued
233. gure 93 Guest VLAN Example ZER gt VLAN 100 NU Internet VLAN 102 Use this screen to enable and assign a guest VLAN to a port In the Port Authentication gt 802 1x screen click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown Note You can not enable the Guest VLAN feature on a port when a subnet based VLAN or protocol based VLAN is activated on the Switch LE GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Figure 94 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN A TES 802 1x Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Multi Host Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to enable the guest VLAN feature on this port Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited
234. h Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning ERAS ioe PARA Alea TERE EATER RRS TEARS TESEI T dE E Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian I CES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme
235. hanges depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol a Spanning Iree Protocol Status d Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch ELS GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration a OE ui Spanning Tree Mode ree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Sp
236. hanges to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 5 Error Disable Recovery Configuration Use this screen to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 150 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery Errdisable Recovery Errdisable Active E Reason Timer Status interval gt O loopguard F 300 ARP F 300 BPDU O 300 IGMP O 300 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to turn on the error disable recovery function on the Switch Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you configure Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 29 Error Disable Table 92 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery continued
237. he computer will not able to get an IP address 10 To check if DHCP snooping works go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard you should see an IP assignment with the type dhcp snooping as shown Figure 31 Tutorial Check the Binding If DHCP Snooping Works EE IP Source Guard J Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 amp 6d23h17m 0s dhcp snooping 100 You can also telnet or log into the Switch s console Use the command show dhcp snooping binding to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next sysname show dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port 00 02 00 00 00 1e6 10 10 1 16 6d23h59m20s dhcp snooping 100 7 Total number of bindings 1 6 3 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 3 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and want to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 to DHCP client A based on the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Figure 32 Tutorial DHCP Rela
238. he current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 25 10 2 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 37 on page 287 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 25 10 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch Configure DHCP snooping See Section 25 10 1 4 on page 213 Note It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Loop Guard 26 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 134 Loop Guard vs STP Loop Guard mmm mmm mW ee eee eee eee eee A Refer to Section 26 1 2 on page 215 for more information 26 1 1 What You Can Do
239. he forwarding table Figure 104 MVR Multicast Television Example Multicast VLAN m us Fu m m mmm VLAN 1 f m m om 2 23 2 Multicast Status 170 Click Advanced Applications Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 23 1 on page 168 for more information on multicasting Figure 105 Advanced Application gt Multicast a DMRS Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Advanced Application gt Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 23 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications Multicast Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 23 1 on page 168 for more information on multicasting Figure 106 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting Multicast Setting Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active E Querier Dn IGMP Snooping Host Timeout 260 802 1p Priority No Change r IGMP Filtering Active Unknown Multicast Frame Lo Flooding C Drop Reserved
240. he same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode 1EEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 11 on page 71 for more information PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port If left unchecked the PD connected to the port cannot receive power from the Switch PD Priority This field is only available on the model that supports PoE but not available for the Dual Personality Interfaces When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch t
241. he target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 40 2 Viewing the ARP Table Use the ARP table to view I P to MAC address mapping s and remove specific dynamic ARP entries GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 40 ARP Table Click Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 199 Management gt ARP Table xxu Index e wU NN O An Condition IP Address 0 0 0 0 Q Port IP Address MAC Address VID Port Type 10 1 2 2 00 19 cb 6f 91 59 1 0 static 192 168 1 2 00 19 cb 6f 91 59 1 0 static 192 168 1 103 00 21 85 0c 44 4b 1 8 dynamic 192 168 10 2 00 19 cb 6f 91 59 102 0 static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 126 Management gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Specify how you want the Switch to remove ARP entries when you click Flush Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table Select IP Address and enter a
242. his field shows the number of good unicast packets received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received TX Collision elds display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of pack
243. hout the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 31 1 1 What You Can Do Use the DiffServ screen Section 31 2 on page 241 to activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the Switch Use the DSCP screen Section 31 3 1 on page 242 to change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping 31 1 2 What You Need to Know Read on for concepts on Differentiated Services that can help you configure the screens in this chapter DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 153 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be ma
244. i BEmg n pjinjnmn L SE LEE L DDH e LEE DHD e alsixizgi amp a GIR JEJE EE 25 26 27 28 19 20 21 22 23 2 15 16 17 18 14 n 1 10 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Port Based VLAN Setup label Description Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the
245. iately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 27 on page 110 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 109 for more information on RSTP GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on
246. ic settings 301 302 port details 63 port isolation 99 port mirroring 134 135 direction 135 egress 135 ingress 135 port redundancy 137 port security 151 limit MAC address learning 153 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 327 Index MAC address learning 151 overview 151 setup 152 217 221 port setup 75 port status 61 port VLAN ID see PVID 91 port VLAN trunking 85 port based VLAN 96 all connected 99 port isolation 99 settings wizard 99 ports diagnostics 286 mirroring 134 speed duplex 76 standby 138 power voltage 68 power connector 35 power consumption 307 power specification 307 power status 68 PPPoE IA trusted ports 225 untrusted ports 225 priority level 72 priority queue assignment 72 product registration 322 protocol based VLAN 94 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 94 application example 94 configuration example 99 isolate traffic 94 priority 95 un tagged packets 95 PVID 84 PVID Priority Frame 84 Q QoS and classifier 154 queue weight 166 queuing 165 SPQ 165 WRR 165 queuing method 165 167 R rack mounting 27 RADIUS 182 183 advantages 183 and port authentication 183 and tunnel protocol attribute 191 Network example 182 server 183 settings 183 setup 183 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 109 rear panel connections 35 reboot load configuration 257 reboot system 257 registration product 322 related documentation 3 remote management 268 service 269 trusted computers 269 remov
247. icast Setting screen Section 23 3 on page 171 to enable IGMP snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Use the IGMP Snooping VLAN screen Section 23 4 on page 174 to Configure how the Switch learns multicast group membership information and add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Use the IGMP Filtering Profile screen Section 23 5 on page 175 to specify a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join Use the MVR screens Section 23 6 on page 176 to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN 23 1 2 What You Need to Know Read on for concepts on Multicasting that can help you configure the screens in this chapter IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by I ANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information IGMP Snooping A Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing GS22
248. ide Index max age 121 hops 121 MDIX Media Dependent Interface Crossover 34 MIB and SNMP 270 supported MIBs 271 MIB Management Information Base 270 mirroring ports 134 monitor port 135 mounting brackets 28 MRSTP status 118 MSTID 127 MST Instance See MSTI 127 MST region 126 MSTI 127 MSTP 109 112 bridge ID 124 125 configuration 120 123 configuration digest 125 forwarding delay 121 Hello Time 124 hello time 121 Max Age 124 max age 121 max hops 121 path cost 122 port priority 122 revision level 121 status 123 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 70 Multicast 168 multicast 168 802 1 priority 172 and IGMP 168 IGMP throttling 173 IP addresses 168 overview 168 setup 171 172 multicast group 175 multicast VLAN 178 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 111 Multiple RSTP 111 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 109 112 Multiple STP 112 MVR 169 configuration 176 group configuration 178 network example 169 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 169 N network applications 23 network management system NMS 270 NTP RFC 1305 69 P PAGP 222 password 44 administrator 267 PHB Per Hop Behavior 241 ping test connection 286 policy 161 and classifier 161 and DiffServ 160 configuration 161 example 164 overview 160 rules 160 viewing 163 Port Aggregation Protocol see PAgP port authentication 145 and RADIUS 183 EEE802 1x 147 186 port based VLAN type 71 port cloning 301 302 advanced settings 301 302 bas
249. iled 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRoutePathChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 1 This trap is sent when path to target has changed from a previously determined path traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 275 Chapter 35 Access Control Table 116 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 36 2 1 This trap is sent when the MRSTP root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 36 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 36 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 36 2 1 MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 107 70 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 107 70 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 107 70 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 107 70 1 STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 36 2 2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 36 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 36 2
250. iltering Profile ED IGMP Filtering Profle ng Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Ada Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL Profile Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 175 Chapter 23 Multicast Table 58 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save lin
251. ing fuses 315 resetting 45 256 to factory default settings 256 restoring configuration 45 258 RFC 3164 287 Round Robin Scheduling 165 RSTP 109 S safety certifications 313 safety warnings 8 save configuration 44 256 Secure Shell See SSH service access control 268 service port 268 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP Small Form factor Pluggable SFP 34 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Index SNMP 270 agent 270 and MIB 270 and security 271 authentication 265 266 communities 263 management model 270 manager 270 MIB 271 network components 270 object variables 270 protocol operations 270 security 265 266 setup 262 trap group 264 users 265 version 3 271 versions supported 270 SNMP traps 271 272 274 276 setup 264 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 109 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 165 SSH encryption methods 278 how it works 277 implementation 278 SSH Secure Shell 277 SSL Secure Socket Layer 278 standby ports 138 static bindings 194 static link aggregation example 143 static MAC address 101 static MAC forwarding 92 94 101 static multicast address 103 static multicast forwarding 103 static routes 239 static trunking example 143 Static VLAN 88 static VLAN control 89 tagging 89 status 40 61 link aggregation 139 MSTP 123 port 61 port details 63 power 68 STP 115 118 VLAN 86 STP 109 222 bridge ID 116 119 bridge priority 114 117 configuration 114 117 designated bridge 110 for
252. ing screen Section 25 4 on page 196 to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database Use this DHCP Snooping Configure screen Section 25 5 on page 199 to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database Use the DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen Section 25 5 1 on page 201 to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Use the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 25 5 2 on page 203 to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN Use the ARP Inspection Status screen Section 25 6 on page 204 to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Status screen Section 25 7 on page 205 to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN Use the ARP I nspection Log Status screen Section 25 8 on page 206 to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Use the ARP Inspection Configure screen Section 25 9 on page 207 to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global sett
253. ings for the ARP inspection log GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Use the ARP Inspection Port Configure screen Section 25 9 1 on page 208 to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection Use the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen Section 25 9 2 on page 210 to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN 25 1 2 What You Need to Know The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection 25 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from inf
254. ion File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bits no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reas
255. ion MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address VID This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Table 25 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port s within
256. ion for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 35 6 Remote Management Use this screen to specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management to view the screen as shown next GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control sc
257. ion on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 118 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup TACACS ServerSetup AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 ag ri 2 fo 0 0 0 ag ri Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 fas ri 2 0 0 0 0 ag ri Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACAC
258. ional layer 2 layer 3 and layer 4 features suitable for Ethernets The Switch has eight or twenty four 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports It also has two or four GbE dual personality interfaces with each interface comprising one mini GBIC slot and one 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 port with either port or slot active at a time With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management The G2200 24P and G2200 8HP come with a Power over Ethernet PoE feature The GS2200 8HP supports the IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet PoE standard and the GS2200 24P supports the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard Ports 1 to 4 on the GS2200 8HP can supply power of up to 30W per Ethernet port Ports 5 to 8 on the GS2200 8HP and ports 1 to 24 on the GS2200 24P can supply power of up to 15 4W per Ethernet port Key feature differences between Switch models are as follows Other features are common to all models See Chapter 43 on page 307 for a full list of software features available on the Switch Table 1 Model Specific Features FEATURE SWITCH MODEL IEEE 802 3af PoE GS2200 24P IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet PoE GS2200 8HP Power management mode Classification GS2200 24P Power management mode Consumption GS 2200 8HP GS2200 24P Rack mounting GS2200 8 GS2200 8HP GS2200 24 GS2200 24P
259. iority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 10 VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain 9 1 2 1 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave messag
260. ips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 3 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 6 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 000000006 ar 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack S A 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack 2 4 Wall Mounting for GS2200 8 only Do the following to attach your Switch to a wall Insecure mounting may damage the device or cause injury ZyXEL is not responsible for damages incurred by insecure wall mounting 1 Screw the two screws provided with your Switch into the wall 135 mm apart see Figure 7 on page 30 See Figure 8 on page 30 for the size of screws to use Do not screw the screws all the way in to the wall leave a small gap between the head of the screw and the wall The gap must be big enough for the screw heads to slide into the screw slots and the connection
261. ius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your RADIUS server Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via your TACACS server Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user e Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet SSH or FTP to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dotlx Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID assigned via the external server Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorization of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disable
262. k Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 27 STP Path Costs LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE RECOMMENDED RANGE ALLOWED RANGE Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for c
263. k on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 23 6 The MVR Screen Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch 176 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast Note Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 109 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR VLAN Active a JIM Multic
264. ke some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast Table 56 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continu
265. kets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority Multicast Frame IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which I GMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups Unknown Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for multicasting on the local network only For example 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and 224 0 0 9 is used to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to other networks See the IANA web site for more information The layer 2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer 2 protocols 01 00 0C CC CC CC and 01 00 0C CC CC CD are also included in this group Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to ma
266. l based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 22 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Ethernet Type This field shows which Ethernet prot
267. last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted 25 8 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard ARP Inspection Log Status Figure 128 ARP Inspection Log Status Index Port VID A OF Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Apply Total number of logs 0 Sender MAC Sender IP Num Pkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and table that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source po
268. logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 43 Product Specifications Table 129 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authenticatio and Authorization The Switch supports authentication and authorization services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog server Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert b
269. lps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent I nformation This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent I nformation feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent I nformation can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 97 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID
270. m hops 20 i Configuration Name 0023f837ddff Revision Number 10 A Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 w VLAN Range Start JEnd o Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s Port Active Priority Path Cost 1 a 128 4 2 O 128 4 3 O 128 4 4 O 128 E 5 128 Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 77 on page 124 Port Click Port to display the MSTP Port Configuration screen see Figure 76 on page 123 Active Select this to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds the Switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All Switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provide
271. me subnet as the Switch Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 39 for more information Click Basic Setting gt IP Setup in the navigation panel Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask In the VI D field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen Click Add to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off IP Setup 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Server Default Management IP DHCP Client Address O Static IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VID 1 anagement IP Addresses 192 168 2 1 255 255 2550 IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID b Default Gateway o 0 0 0 Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 6 1 Overview Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch The tutorials include How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch 6 2 How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch You only wan
272. ment gt Diagnostic LSO Diagnostic 192 168 1 23 Display Clear IP Address Ping Port 1 Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen LABEL Table 117 Management gt Diagnostic System Log DESCRIPTION GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry Diagnostic Chapter 36 Diagnostic Table 117 Management gt Diagnostic continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test 286 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Syslog 37 1 Overview This chapter explains the syslog screens The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog
273. ment gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configurin
274. mes tagged 91 untagged 91 front panel 31 FTP 259 file transfer procedure 259 restrictions over WAN 260 fuse 315 replacement 315 G GARP 84 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 84 GARP terminology 84 GARP timer 71 84 general features 310 general setup 69 getting help 46 Gigabit ports 33 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 70 GVRP 84 90 91 and port assignment 91 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 84 H hardware installation 27 hardware monitor 67 hardware overview 31 hello time 121 hops 121 HTTPS 278 certificates 278 implementation 278 public keys private keys 278 HTTPS example 279 humidity 308 IEEE 802 1p priority 72 IEEE 802 1x activate 147 186 port authentication 145 reauthentication 148 IGMP version 168 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 168 IGMP filtering profile 175 profiles 172 IGMP leave timeout fast 172 mormal 172 IGMP snooping 168 and VLANs 169 MVR 169 setup 174 IGMP throttling 173 ingress port 99 ingress rate and bandwidth control 130 install fuse 315 installation desktop 27 precautions 27 rack mounting 27 transceivers 34 installation scenarios 27 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide C Index IP address 74 IP interface 73 IP setup 72 IP source guard 193 194 ARP inspection 194 213 DHCP snooping 194 211 static bindings 194 IP subnet mask 74 L L2PT 219 access port 220 CDP 219 configuration 221 encapsulation 219 LACP 220 MAC address 219
275. mode 220 overview 219 PAgP 220 point to point 220 STP 219 tunnel port 220 UDLD 220 VTP 219 LACP 137 222 system priority 143 timeout 143 Layer 2 protocol tunneling see L2PT LEDs 36 limit MAC address learning 153 link aggregation 137 dynamic 137 ID information 138 setup 140 142 status 139 traffic distribution algorithm 139 traffic distribution type 141 trunk group 137 Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP 137 Link Aggregation Control Protocol see LACP 137 lockout 44 log 285 login 39 password 44 login account Administrator 266 non administrator 267 login accounts 266 configuring via web configurator 266 multiple 266 number of 266 login password 267 loop guard 215 examples 216 port shut down 217 setup 217 vs STP 215 MAC Media Access Control 67 MAC address 67 250 299 maximum number per port 153 MAC address learning 92 94 101 153 specify limit 153 MAC filter and ARP inspection 213 MAC freeze 152 MAC table 296 display criteria 298 how it works 296 sorting criteria 298 transfer type 298 viewing 297 maintanence configuration backup 258 firmware 257 restoring configuration 258 maintenance 255 current configuration 255 main screen 255 Management Information Base MIB 270 management port 99 managing the device good habits 26 using FTP See FTP 26 using Telnet See command interface 26 using the command interface See command interface 26 man in the middle attacks 213 GS2200 8 24 User s Gu
276. mt o mmm mmm mm 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application Sales Ka seen cm m t m m m m mm se ee ee ee oe ee ee m ut m m m m m m m m m m See ee eee eee ee eee 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 9 on page 83
277. n GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 39 MAC Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 197 MAC Table Flowchart Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port 39 2 Viewing the MAC Table Use this screen to check whether the MAC address is dynamic or static Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 198 Management gt MAC Table ED MAC table g Can C Static C viD C Port Sort by mac e Dynamic to MAC forwarding C Dynamic to MAC filtering Search Transfer as Transfer Type Index MAC Address VID 1 00 00 aa 10 01 73 00 00 e8 7c 14 80 00 02 e3 56 16 9d 00 02 e3 57 ea 1c 00 04 80 9b 78 00 00 0d 88 ca af b2 00 0e 7b e4 17 19 00 01 b0 80 07 56 on On A wh ca Pos ee ati Ed Port 27 28 27 27 27 27 27 27 Condition C MAC O i hl bl El El Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 297 Chapter 39 MAC Table The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 125 Management gt MAC Table Transfer Type LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Select one of the
278. n Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 160 DHCP Relay Configuration Example E DHCP Relay Status Active Iv Remote DHCP Server 1 fi 92 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Iv Option 82 Information TT GS2200 24 32 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays Note You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 247 Chapter 32 DHCP See Section 8 6 on page 72 for information on how to set up management IP addresses for VLANs Figure 161 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN VLAN ci Status VID Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information O Option 82 Information O VID Type DHCP Status Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 P Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VL
279. n scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule Figure 97 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f81 SrcPort port 2 C Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 50 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Numbers ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 X
280. n IP address to remove the dynamic entries learned with the specified IP address Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries learned on the specified port Flush Click Flush to remove the ARP entries according to the condition you specified Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the ARP table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with the corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address above VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs Port This field displays the port to which the device connects CPU means this learned IP address is the Switch s management IP address Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Configure Clone 41 1 Overview This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 41 2 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 200 Management gt Configure Clone L_ Configure Clone Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Basic Setting Speed Duplex
281. n components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 111 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 111 SNMP Commands COMMAN
282. n make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Max Req Specify the number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client s before sending unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN This is set to 2 by default That is the Switch attempts to authenticate a client twice If the client does not respond to the first authentication request the Switch tries again If the client still does not respond to the second request the Switch blocks the client from accessing the port or sends the client to the Guest VLAN when a Guest VLAN is enabled on the port The client needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch again GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 147 Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 45 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reauth Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauth period Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Quiet period Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further authentication requests from the co
283. nagement allows you to manage multiple switches through one switch called the cluster manager See Chapter 38 on page 290 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection 2 1 Installation Scenarios This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch The Switch can be placed on a desktop or rack mounted on a standard EIA rack Use the rubber feet in a desktop installation and the brackets in a rack mounted installation Note For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Desktop Installation Proced
284. name and or password AuthenticationFailureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password RADI USNotReachableEventCIl ear RADIUSNotReachableEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS server This trap is sent when the RADIUS server can be reached accounting ventOn RADIUSAccNotNotReachableE 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS accounting server ventClear RADI USAccNotNotReachableE 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 56 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 59 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS accounting server can be reached Table 115 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFa
285. nd Editing Policy GOnmQuratan uscar 163 A PAM ia a 164 Chapter 22 III n ricino a a 165 2A TE S MEINTE t mH REN 165 CEN NEST E IE EINE UNES 165 22 1 2 What You Meed to KNOW iiscoqen uve to veis R bete dao 165 eee Lone CE ooa adc at nb ia 166 Chapter 23 FIRE 168 POS CONGUE a E et esM EadePed e adt ente renee he HMM dE iP UEM MER 168 xm NS M IO ORI BI m rc C UT 168 23 1 2 Whal TU Need To KION an 168 eoe MISSE SITUE ces toe atom dea o OI Det aea uoce bebe tato iube pepe orbata istud abu Ern Eta 170 20 MIU See uir ra in 171 23 8 IA SEO VIAE sr A dad db Gaps Esau ub A d dep ON M Ma RR FN ie 174 xcix eec td 175 eM TUS ASS a io 176 ea b MER Grup EGRE said 178 220 2 MYR Configuration Explora 179 Chapter 24 r PM ce caine 182 E NES Ei MT TC STI E ETT EO PINTOR CETUR 182 EOM DNE UM IDEE SU BIO REIR ERE E TH TR 182 24 L2 Whal You Need T KNOW ra uer Oa pra c d e kp a cg ae GG ee E cR n 182 242 ANA OOO A INR M i eMe nid uim 183 203 RADIUS SOS sae 183 SLATAUACO SOUEM BENI in ra 186 a ROS A a a 188 2216 TOSCANO AAA A AAA AAA 190 24 5 1 Vendor SCS DUES A ber ap nas d D aat 190 22 5 2 Suppoed RADIUS ANNDUTES epoca 191 24 6 3 Altributes Used Tor Authentication ica esit prae ot cu li Na gr Ri RR ERE REIS S Rot EAE RD 192 Chapter 25 IP SOUP rti i ianiai aaisan niiae aa 193 PE ONONO ERE T EE S a UREUSUMTT 193 za d Na Your alt EIE asi rien En o dba aiiis e le Pn od DE E e E RR RN 193 25 1 2 What You NESTORIA ES udo 194 o Meme m C
286. ng L3 IP filtering Layer 4 TCP UDP socket Multicast IGMP snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 16 VLAN maximum user configurable AAA Support RADIUS and TACACS GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 43 Product Specifications Table 130 Feature Specifications continued Security Static MAC address filtering Static MAC address forwarding MAC Freeze IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Limiting number of dynamic MAC addresses per port SSH v1 v2 SSL Multiple RADIUS servers Multiple TACACS servers 802 1X VLAN and bandwidth assignment IP source guard Static IP MAC binding DHCP snooping ARP Inspection ARP Freeze Guest VLAN PPPoE IA and option 82 Configurable ARP learning mode PoE feature Classification mode GS2200 8HP and q GS2200 24P only Consumption mode IPv6 DHCPv6 client and relay ICMPv6 IPv6 Path MTU NDP host IPv6 address stateless auto configuration host The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 131 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet Encapsulation RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol
287. ning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 109 for more information on MRSTP GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP a Spanning Iree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree T Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge Port ID OX0000 Topology Changed Times D Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time second Max Age secon
288. ning mode on a per port basis 33 1 2 What You Need to Know Read on for concepts on ARP that can help you configure the screen in this chapter 33 1 2 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address it sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 33 1 2 2 ARP Learning Mode The Switch supports three ARP learning modes ARP Reply Gratuitous ARP and ARP Request ARP Reply By default the Switch is in ARP Reply learning mode and updates the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP requests sent by the Switch This can help prevent ARP spoofing In the following example the Switch does not have IP
289. nnected client after a failed authentication exchange Tx period Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response before re sending an identity request to the client Supp Timeout Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response to a challenge request before sending another request Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 3 1 Guest VLAN When 802 1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports clients that do not have the correct credentials are blocked from using the port s You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN that acts as a guest VLAN If you enable the guest VLAN 102 in the example on a port 2 in the example the user A in the example that is not IEEE 802 1x capable or fails to enter the correct username and password can still access the port but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest VLAN That is unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest VLAN such as the Internet The rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network feature Fi
290. nonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 34 6 5 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately 260 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Access Control 35 1 Overview This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different user names and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 104 Access Control Overview Console Port One session SSH FTP Web Up to five accounts Telnet SNMP Share up to nine One session No limit sessions A console port access control session an
291. nspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 42 Troubleshooting 4 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor 42 2 Switch Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Switch 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Use the console port to log in to the Switch 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 45 forgot the username and or password 1 The default username is admin and the default password is 1234 2 fthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 45 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Switch 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 3 3 on page 36 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch
292. nt IP Address rana 49 Chapter 6 UU 51 A O 51 6 2 How to Use DACP Sneoping ri the SICA anna an d BEER Een Ado SE ue TERR oo gn 51 6 3 How to Use DHCP Relay on Whe SIA M H 54 Gai DHGP Relay Tuloral IMPONGA cisco A e 55 Se ISI ALA a E rere ere rrererte reer ere ere rt rer 55 Bog Comuna DRUG HEU Ri 58 nona DEDOS DUC amar a ipod 59 Chapter 7 System Strus and Pori SSi 60 EVA AAA A te ee E E ee A A 60 as ME AA A E IA 60 2 POESIAS THREE ta 61 preowecru d oro att 63 12 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 8 c cS ul m m 66 cxx ini ANN TTD I TI IESU MERE eet Rn END INI E INR 66 Mm Meno 66 gs UE NT e sexsi casas cin oodd pU aud A x ba E nO ama 67 Do ISS is dances cicam lac dere eae eee 69 B4 Inopdaeig T9 TEANS Loan pq dae tavaus RR ER ER D ERR EDERR CER un Rei EERM A 70 Enn Der A D DTE 71 nl e PR 72 8 6 1 Management IP Address S Lesung addi Haad ia 73 abcr dA rr 75 cn PUE SIE 76 SO PRES CU aaa o a RTT IE 79 Chapter 9 VILLAIN dis 83 9I RON sscotabetterdqurebididde a atedo peri dme EEUU DEEP CU CUdU De D b ben eH Pete Re fs Du da Dro a 83 AET WSL TAR DO EU IE IN 83 Se Mt CORE NOAA idas 83
293. ntification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to IP Multicast Addresses on page 168 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to IP Multicast Addresses on page 168 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 23 6 2 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN
294. number in hexadecimal format six hexadecimal character pairs Type value Refer to Table 50 on page 157 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address ports Any Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 48 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier IP Protocol Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer to Table 51 on page 157 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Prefix A subnet mask can be represented in a 32 bit notation For example the subnet mask 255 255 255 0
295. number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore 25 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt I P Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 123 DHCP Snoopi ng Configure E DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active E co Disable an C Po gt Database Agent URL Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval 300 seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on
296. o configure error disable related settings Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 147 Advanced Application gt Errdisable a ETE CPU protection Click here Errdisable Detect Click here Errdisable Recovery Click here 29 3 CPU Protection Configuration Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets ARP BPDU and or IGMP that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the Advanced Application Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Note After you configure this screen make sure you also enable error detection for the specific control packets in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect screen Figure 148 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection CPU protection J Errdisable Reason ARP Port Rate Limit pkt s S OeOpjojyojprcoyoj coli coclIi o CO NM Co Cn 4 CO Nh 232 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 29 Error Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments to each
297. o erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch Figure 40 Status gt Port Details GH Port Details 4 Port Status Port Info Port NO 1 Name Link 100M F Status FORWARDING LACP Disabled TxPkts 22794 RxPkts 82314 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 206 Rx KBs s 13 532 Up Time 0 29 48 TX Packet Unicast 22732 Multicast 6 Broadcast 56 Pause 0 RX Packet Unicast 26066 Multicast 5264 Broadcast 50984 Pause 0 TX Collision Single 0 Multiple 0 Excessive 0 Late 0 Error Packet RX CRC 0 Length 0 Runt 0 Distribution 64 50229 65 to 127 7470 128 to 255 13381 256 to 511 4897 512 to 1023 424 1024 to 1518 5913 Giant 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber GS2200 8 2
298. o provide power to ports with higher priority Select Critical to give the highest PD priority on the port Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical priority ports are served Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are served Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 8 PoE Status Note The following screens are available for the GS2200 8HP or GS2200 24P model only Some features are only available for the Ethernet ports 1 to 8 or 1 to 24 76 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting The GS2200 8HP supports the IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet PoE standard and the GS2200 24P supports the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard A powered device PD is a device such as an access point or a switch that supports PoE Power over Ethernet so that it can receive power from another device through an Ethernet port In the figure below the IP camera and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch Aside from minimizing the need for cables and wires PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a
299. o switches B C and D Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider s network GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To emulate a point to point topology between two customer switches at different sites such as A and B you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and 2 for PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP or UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection Figure 140 L2PT Network Example 1 Service Provider s Network 27 1 2 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes Access and Tunnel The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider s edge device 1 or 2 in Figure 140 on page 220 and connected to a customer switch A or B Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider s network and connected to another service provider s switch Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 27 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Click Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 141 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling EE Layer Destinati
300. o upload the latest firmware Use the Restore Configuration screen Section 34 4 on page 258 to upload a stored device configuration file Use the Backup Configuration screen Section 34 5 on page 258 to save your configurations for later use 34 2 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 165 Management gt Maintenance Maintenance Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 102 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 34 Maintenance Table 102 Management gt Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuration Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuration Load Factory Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the f
301. oE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN VID 123 124 125 126 127 128 AR ED Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Enabled Circuit id Remote id No No Yes No No No No 15 28 0 SS ES HLS p0 L 0800 S S PES EE DEDI The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Enabled Select this option to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN Circuit id Select this option to make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Remote id Select this option to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Apply Click Apply to save your
302. oE Setup PoE Mode Classification Total Power WW 220 0 Consuming Power W 0 0 Allocated Power VV 0 0 Remaining Power VV 220 0 Consuming Max Current Port State Class PD Priority Max Power mVV Power mW m 1 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 2 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 3 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 4 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 5 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 6 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 ri Enable Low 0 0 RU bee poc c LE NES ls MR el Lo 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Basic Setting gt PoE Status LABEL DESCRIPTION POE Status PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch whether it is in Classification or Consumption mode Total Power This field displays the total power the Switch can provide to the connected PoE enabled devices on the PoE ports Consuming This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the connected Power W PoE enabled devices Allocated Power W This field displays the total amount of power the Switch has reserved for PoE after negotiating with the connected PoE device s It shows NA when the Switch is in Consumption mode Consuming Power W can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated Power W Remaining This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE Power W Note The GS2200 24P must have at least 20 W of remaining power in order to supply power to a Po
303. ocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 7 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it Note In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 7 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen and then click Advanced Application gt VLAN f
304. od or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Index Numbers 802 1P priority 76 A AAA 182 AAA Authentication and Authorization 182 access control limitations 261 login account 266 remote management 268 service port 268 SNMP 270 address learning MAC 92 94 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 250 299 301 302 administrator password 267 age 121 aggregator ID 140 142 airflow 36 applications backbone 23 bridging 24 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 25 switched workgroup 24 ARP how it works 250 299 viewing 299 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 250 299 ARP inspection 194 213 and MAC filter 213 configuring 214 syslog messages 214 trusted ports 214 authentication 182 setup 188 Authentication and
305. oes above or below the normal operating range This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets ControlledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 0 1 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 1 5 8 56 27 2 1 5 8 59 27 2 1 5 8 60 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 55 27 2 2 5 8 56 27 2 2 5 8 59 27 2 2 5 8 60 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server 272 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control Table 112 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTIO
306. on MAC Address Protocol Tunne Active ea ee Port OOM ini oinieiwini a E Mer MES M3 CDP STP VIP PAGP ri ri ri ri H E r ri ri C ri O 17 m ri m C E O O ri Ci O Md C O m 0 ri r ri 0 rn O n rj O O ri ri r ri C r m r O r O r r Point to Point LACP O OCE OECO E EE E E DE SE EE UDLD ri q o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mode Access y Access y Access y Access y Access y Access y Access Access y Access y Access y Access y Access y Access v LAU cess y Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling MAC Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch Destination Specify a MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets Note The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address If you use a unicast MAC address make sure the MAC address does not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider s network Note All the edge switches in the service provider s network should be set to use the same MAC address for encapsulation Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by p
307. on is to foward the packets to the egress port the Switch will forward the packets If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to drop the packets Policy 2 applies to Class 2 and the action is to enable bandwidth limitation the Switch will discard the packets immediately If Policy 1 applies to Class 1 and the action is to foward the packets to the egress port Policy 2 applies to Class 2 and the action is to enable bandwidth limitation the Switch will forward the packets Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the packet s 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Outgoing Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Select Set the packet s VLAN ID to replace the VLAN ID of the packets with the value you configure in the VLAN ID field Rate Limit Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the field
308. onfiguring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EB Chapter 8 Basic Setting GS2200 8 24 User s Guide VLAN 9 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen 9 1 1 What You Can Do Use the VLAN Status screen Section 9 2 on page 86 to view all VLAN groups Use the VLAN Detail screen Section 9 2 1 on page 87 to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group Use the Static VLAN screen Section 9 3 on page 88 to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch Use the VLAN Port Setting screen Section 9 4 on page 90 to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port Use the Subnet Based VLAN screen Section 9 5 on page 91 to set up VLANs that allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify Use the Protocol Based VLAN screen Section 9 6 on page 94 to set up VLANs that allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify Use the Port Based VLAN screen Section 9 7 on page 96 to set up VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port 9 1 2 What You Need to Know Read this section to know more about VLAN and how to configure the screens IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag
309. onnected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 28 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUS are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and proce
310. ons Figure 21 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Initial Setup Example 5 1 Overview This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Configure the Switch IP management address 5 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN NN _ Internet TAA cm pan noooo GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link LG VEAN Status VLAN Search by VID VLAN Port Setting j Search Static VLAN The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID 1 1 Elapsed Time 49 08 49 Change Pages Previous Next Status Static 2 In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in
311. ontrol System Info Static Multicast Forwarding DHCP Diagnostic General Setup Filtering ARP Learning Syslog Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protocol Cluster Management Ip Setup Bandwidth Control MAC Table Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control ARP Table Mirroring Configure Clone Link Aggregation GS2200 8HP 24P Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Basic Setting Policy Rule Advanced Application Queuing Method IP Application RE AAA Management IP Source Guard Loop Guard System Info Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling General Setup PPPoE Switch Setup Errdisable IP Setup Port Setup PoE The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports PoE For GS2200 8HP or GS2200 24P only This
312. or all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them ARP Learning Select the ARP learning mode the Switch uses on the port Mode Select ARP Reply to have the Switch update the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP requests sent by the Switch Select Gratuitous ARP to have the Switch update its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a gratuitous ARP request Select ARP Request to have the Switch update the ARP table with both ARP replies gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 33 ARP Learning GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 34 1 Overview Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 34 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Maintenance screen Section 34 2 on page 255 to return to the factory defaults save the current configuration settings and restart the Switch Use the Firmware Upgrade screen Section 34 3 on page 257 t
313. or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted HTTP I CMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 35 Access Control 35 7 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter 35 7 1 About SNMP 270 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP I P based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 178 SNMP Management Model Manager din Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two mai
314. ormation provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard Figure 120 P Source Guard a NINIT Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 P Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 67 P Source Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 25 3 IP Sou
315. ort basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Table 80 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling continued LABEL DESCRIPTION CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol packets so that other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider s network STP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP Spanning Tree Protocol packets so that STP can run properly across the service provider s network and spanning trees can be set up based on bridge information from all local and remote networks VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets so that all customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider s network Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol and UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection tunneling for a point to point topology Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco s proprietary data link layer protocols PAgP is similar to LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically UDLD is to determine the link s physical status and detect a unidirectional link PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to a peer to automatically negotiate and build a logic
316. ory when you are done configuring 174 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 23 Multicast Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Index Click this to clear the fields This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 23 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 108 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP F
317. ough the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 196 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 0 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp ls 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W W w 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config W Ww w 1 owner group O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 400BPNO bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 124 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 400BPNO bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is
318. p to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Person s Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable Name ASCII characters spaces are allowed Use Time Server Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all when Bootup protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 0 Time Server IP Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to Address 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu
319. plays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Action This field displays the filter type for the MAC address Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 Overview The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 13 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Spanning Tree Protocol status screen Section 13 2 on page 112 to view the STP status in the different STP modes RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you can configure on the Switch Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen Section 13 3 on page 113 to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol screen Section 13 4 on page 114 to configure RSTP settings Use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen Section 13 5 on page 115 to display the status screen as shown ne
320. ple Ethernet Type Source Destination IP Protocol Source Destination all Y E O others Hew MAC Address Part O Any MAC Address mac ale lks Al Establish Only Ooter Dec IP Address Address Prefix ERE O Any Socket Number pM o IP Address pa Address Prefix O Any Socket Number GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Policy Rule 21 1 Policy Rules Overview This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 20 on page 154 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 21 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Policy screen Section 21 2 on page 160 to enable the policy and display the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen 21 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 20 2 on page 154 for more information GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Click Advanced Applications gt Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 99 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule 6 Policy g Active El Classifier s VLAN ID Parameters Priority Noc Priority Noc Action C Sett Outgoing F Sett Rate Lim Index Active Name Egr
321. plorer 7 or 8 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 279 Chapter 35 Access Control When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a screen with the message There is a problem with this website s security certificate may display If that is the case click Continue to this website not recommended to proceed to the web configurator login screen Figure 183 Security Certificate Warning Internet Explorer 7 or 8 There is a problem with this website s security certificate The security certificate presented by this website was issued for a different website s address server We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website Y Click here to close this webpage G Continue to this website not recommended More information The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept any data you send to the After you log in you will see the red address bar with the message Certificate Error Click on Certificate Error next to the address bar and click View certificates Figure 184 Certificate Error Internet Explorer 7 or 8 Web Configurator Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by ZyXEL Jej Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help 8 1 lid Certificate Invalid x Google v I search o The security certificate presented by this
322. power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 27 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 27 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch 27 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Layer 2 Protocol Tunnel screen Section 27 2 on page 221 to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch and specify a MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets 27 1 2 What You Need to Know Layer 2 protocol tunneling L2PT is used on the service provider s edge devices L2PT allows edge switches 1 and 2 in the following figure to tunnel layer 2 STP Spanning Tree Protocol CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol and VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets between customer switches A B and C in the following figure connected through the service provider s network The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them across the service provider s network to other edge switches Figure 139 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario In the following example if you enable L2PT for STP you can have switches A B C and D in the same spanning tree even though switch A is not directly connected t
323. program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 118 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message SN Oj Ol B W Njej O Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 37 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Syslog Setup screen Section 37 2 on page 287 to configure the device s system logging settings Use the Syslog Server Setup screen Section 37 3 on page 289 to configure a list of external syslog servers 37 2 Syslog Setup Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 287 Chapter 37 Syslog 288 Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Figure 190 Management gt Syslog IP e Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active Logging type Active Facility System iv local use 0 y Interface Vv local use 0 Switch iv local use 0 AAA Vv local use D local use 0 y xl Apply Cancel The following table describ
324. pter 22 Queuing Method The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring T Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority Queuing services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Weight When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their wei
325. r settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA 24 4 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section on page 183 for more informat
326. r than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Appendix B Common Services GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright O 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications S Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies wit
327. rce Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static bin ding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding Figure 121 P Source Guard Static Binding IP Source Guard Static Binding IPSG ARP Freeze O An Condition Port List ARP Freeze VLAN List Static Binding MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port T Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 P Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION ARP Freeze Condition Select one of the buttons and click ARP Freeze to create static bindings from previously learned ARP entries which match the criteria you specified Select All to create static bindings from any previously learned ARP entries in the Switch s ARP table and add them in the IP source guard static binding table Select Port List and enter the number of the port s to create static bindings from previously learned A
328. reen Figure 177 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management Remote Management J Access Control Secured Client Setup Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FIP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 v 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v v v v v v v 2 0000 O 0000 3 OF 0000 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 O loo000 0 000 9 O 0000 0 0 0 0 O 10 0000 0000 1 loooo 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 13 OF 0000 0000 44 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 155 O 0000 0 0 0 0 O 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address End Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service
329. reen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Mirroring Mirrorina Active E Monitor Port fi Oo OOM Dn amp why Port Mirrored Direction Ingress y Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress Ingress v Ingress v DiDEDBEDBEBEDBEBIBEDBIB D TH Ingress v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL Active DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor Port The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing I n
330. rked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 154 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows An example traffic policy is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 154 DiffServ Network Nara P Platinum G Gold B S Silver B B Bronze 31 2 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the Switch Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 155 IP Application gt DiffServ A auccm DSCP Setting Active O GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 31 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 P Application gt DiffServ LABEL D
331. rom the navigation panel to display the next screen Figure 59 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Apply All connected v Setting Wizard Incoming 3 22 23 24 25 26 21 2 a EN 2 e 2 En o s P a m a e a A a a 2 o eo e o m a x 4 9 amp 2 0 aoc om 2 2 2 5 2 2 HON EEEEE BEBE BEBE Bibi 2 e DERBE e e o gt Bo e ls gt gt o E gt gt o B bbb 2 BIBRIRIR B gt b gt gt e BIRR gt o gt eB B b 5 bliblblblb s gt gt e RLE s amp gt Bl eee e e BEBBE Le blblblblb 5 gt e e 2 B eee 5 BRIBE s gt gt e e bli bl s 5 e gt e Bl b bx BERDEL gt e gt e bibl bl s gt e eB ARDEN gt gt gt gt HENNE gt e e e AEN RAEE e e gt gt BEERE gt gt gt o EEEE E e BIBIBIBIB e e DREMEL e e e e EEEE bib blblb gt BBB gt 2 gt ERRE BIBI bible gt gt gt gt b b blblb s gt gt gt gt BEREE gt gt bbb e DERRE gt e e e ARRIERE gt gt e gt DEE B bbb DERA gt e e e BARRER gt ee e KE bb 2 gt P BIRIBIBI Be vv gt 2 Bi eile gt ee e Bib eee x blblblblb gt blblblblb 5 e e bolle b bbb b BEBBE gt gt ee AARDE e e e e ERE DREDD gt gt gt gt e BERBE gt gt gt gt gt BEREE gt gt 2 blbjblblb gt gt gt gt gt ERRE gt gt gt e Bie b blb s gt gt ENEE x gt gt gt ERRE gt gt
332. rst When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight portion the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on Guaranteed quantum is calculated as Queue Weight x 2048 bytes Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being u
333. rst to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Select this check box to activate ingress rate limits on this port Ingress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port Note Ingress rate bandwidth control applies to layer 2 traffic only Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control Table 37 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these Apply changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control 15 1 Overview This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When th
334. rt Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 45 Basic Setting gt Port Setup a OLDEST Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control PD PD Priority Priority d Auto iM O 0v Critical 1 v 10 1004000M Auto i ej 0 Y v Low v 2 v 10 100 1000M Auto v E 0v v Low 3 E 40 100 1000M Auto v oO 0v Y Low wv 4 v 10 100 1000M Auto y O 0 M Y Low bz 5 Y 10 100 1000M Auto ix O 0 hd v Low v 6 v 10 100 1000M Auto Y O Ov Y Low M 7 E 10 100 1000M Auto y 0v Y Low w 8 Y 10 100 1000M Auto v 0v Y Low y 9 M 10 100 1000M_ Auto w Ov v Low v 10 E 10 100 1000M Auto y a 0v Y Low w 11 v 10 100 1000M uto v E 0v Y w v M Auto vi 0 4 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number E Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enable
335. rt of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender MAC This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 25 9 on page 207 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 75 ARP Inspection Log Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See
336. rt without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to screens where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port Authentication This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to screens where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port Multicast This link takes you to screens where you can configure various multicast features GMP snooping and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication authorization services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source Guard This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard
337. s back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 53 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Cancel This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy 21 2 1 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Figure 100 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active Name Classifier s Delete Yes Test Example rH Delete Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule 21 3 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer
338. s of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 61 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client the authentication Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 24 2 AAA Screens The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the Switch First configure your authentication server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority activate authorization Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 116 Advanced Application gt AAA LD RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here AAA Setup Click Here 24 3 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section on page 183 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 24 6 2 on page 191 for RADIUS attributes utilized by GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 24 AAA the authentication features on the Switch
339. s section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 34 6 2 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 103 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config cfg This is the configuration filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch 34 6 2 1 Example FTP Commands ftp put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename differ
340. s shown Figure 91 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Port Authentication 802 1x Click here GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication 18 3 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 92 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x EVA Port Authentication Guest Vlan Active Port Active Mac fian Reauth Reauth period Quiet period Tx period Supp Timeout secs secs secs secs gt On 1 Ol 2 On 3600 60 30 30 2 2 On 3600 60 30 30 3 2 On 3600 60 30 30 4 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 5 2 On 3600 60 30 30 6 2 On 3600 60 30 30 7 2 On 3600 60 30 30 UU ee Ne Np Re RR RAP nw 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and the
341. s tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for this feature Table 81 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 223 Chapter 28 PPPoE The Tag Type is 0x0105 for vendor specific tags as defined in RFC 2516 The Tag Len indicates the length of Value i1 and i2 The Value is the 32 bit number 0x00000DE9 which stands for the ADSL Forum IANA entry il and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub options which contain additional information about the PPPoE client 28 1 2 2 Sub Option Format There are two types of sub option Agent Circuit ID Sub option and Agent Remote ID Sub option They have the following formats Table 82 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format User defined String SubOpt Length Value Table 83 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub option Format SubOpt Length Value The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option and 2 identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The next field specifies the length of the field The Switch takes the Circuit ID string you manually configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit ID string for a port as the second priority In addition the Switch puts the PPPoE client s MAC address into the Agent Remote ID Sub option if you do not specify any user defined string Flexible Circuit ID Syntax with Identifier String and Variables If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLA
342. s the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 8 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the Switch IP address default gateway device the default domain name server and the management VLAN ID The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway next hop for outgoing traffic 72 GS2200 8
343. s the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 72 on page 116 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 117 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds
344. s to be performed on a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 21 on page 160 to configure policy rules 20 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 21 on page 160 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Click Advanced Application gt Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 96 Advanced Application gt Classifier EN Classifier g Active L1 Name O All v Ethernet Type m O others Hex O Any MAC Address oe MAC Layer 2 Source O Any Port z O O Any Destination MAC Address 3 O MAC O All M Establish Onl IP Protocol a ao E O Others Dec IP Address press Address Prefix POE Source O Any Layer 3 Socket Number _ Ol IP Address Address Prefix ars Destination o Any SocketNumber Index Active Name Rule Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Layer 2 Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type
345. sdium one ao 260 Chapter 35 DOCCE CONH Ol iudei tiene HER LP EB OE peter erry LEERLO EEUU ROLE ERI REEL IRL STI 261 CS EL EU NEN UE EIDEM He RR ERN EUN 261 ENNIO UR ROC ROR END ES EE QU a 261 35 2 The Access Gontrol Main Ser uso esten e noe asm e Epp t diia a s eee e ri E ERE 261 zum MIA SAME ardid ieddd 262 253 1 Comuna SNMP TVS GOUD aout eee eiie Enta ate ee Epp Rabe Ente Ed rp o Ut EE cada 264 A a SEP A cash ad EE Ea Oran E calida dua hd Sp lbid E 265 Sauna UBA esr ccm 266 25 5 S6C Par ACCESS CONTO usus icd ee HEP EIER pud EBERT 268 30 0 GMOS Managem S 268 AD BEME Pi ETRE A oO O y E A 270 EAE nici amm 270 Se SSH RA a D o E E DOE 277 o A A 278 Chapter 36 RCM US o E 285 MEE TIUS BONN OO m UE TA 285 TO Diamo iE C 285 Chapter 37 A AAA AA 287 EPRE E E A UU ces ey re Ren Rea eR ee mere renee THEN RN Te 287 37 NE Whai rou Can fe S T a ners rere pence rr enrer cere trent ry tec recitrercseetr ree rerttnere remer eters 287 trcs co ing 11 eI E E UU terre rere Treaty 287 Ar mS SEM DIIS nd E 289 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 38 CAI cur cir eR 290 CINES os ss DOTT ST LS 290 20 1 1 Wh Yol Can DG ea 291 92 Cluster puris ile RT 291 35 9 Clustering Management Configuration estrias neii niie aa AEEA 292 20 TESIS RTO S a HR DAN a cautery OR rRE MADRE POOR E Rr rHPE METER RP n UA E RP
346. sed This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 22 2 Configuring Queuing Use this screen to set priorities for the queues of the Switch This distributes bandwidth across the different traffic queues Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 102 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method a EMITEN Port Method Weight Hybrid SPQ Qo Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Lowest Queue sea I dT TT None isi 1 Owe fi bp b bh b p p f None i 2 Owa f 2 3 4 5 6 7 e None 3 Ow f 2 s 4 5 6 7 le None v O WRR O spa 4 Owa 2 la 4 5 6 7 ls None v O WRR O spa Owra 2 3 la Trek TS 4 5 7 le None O WRR O spa 20 Owa 2 s la la 6 7 le None v O WRR O spa z owah b Bs Hh Pb b Fb Je nome O WRR O spa 2 Owa t E 3 4 5 B 7 le None v O WRR 166 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Cha
347. services Guest Vlan A guest VLAN is a pre configured VLAN on the Switch that allows non authenticated users to access limited network resources through the Switch You must also enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on the Switch and the associated ports Enter the number that identifies the guest VLAN Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network Host mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one user connect to the port using a hub Select Multi Host to authenticate only the first user that connects to this port If the first user enters the correct credential any other users are allowed to access the port without authentication If the first user fails to enter the correct credential they are all put in the guest VLAN Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the port rest of the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again Select Multi Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 46 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Multi Secure If you set Host mode to Multi Secure specify the maximum number of users between Num 1 and 9 that the Switch will authenticate on this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these
348. ssed All information frames are received and forwarded Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only Figure 68 MRSTP Network Example GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen c
349. ste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Usor o EESTI A ILI III Ti E NE 21 Geng To HOW YOU VER a atada 23 Hardware Installation and Connecter scsi ica a PVT nne ic aiii 27 EMS pata td A 21 8 A 37 Te Ve O COO O aoira aia a aa O 39 tal SoN ES I SL Mm RE 47 TOAS SA A T trey Sl Sustei Sams and Por SIS B diaria iaa iia 60 Basit SSI ena M M 66 E ira ds 83 gc MAC Palati SU aid 101 eue Muheast FOWA SO ons et pndpkebo GR Mu EP e ug aor ER Ae n DR EM A FR DR Tre rete rM d 103 a iet o EN TU 107 Spaning TES PONCO T 109 Bat OE ioenotispi o eb boe enn a aA DE YER ER x 129 Bircadcast SUIT ODE iii 132 uma 134 EID OCIO RUE TE E addu prO DON a eq Ubi ERU T DUE Duces E T T DH GALE ESQ UD PSOE UU EDU OLEO UD Lar Por AURON CANO aia aia 145 Foto ocu AO 181 CASI da TOT LT 154 xil Mem M 160 A SUP TTIW PATIO is DD A taniandd iaaa 165 ID MC E ISTE 168 MAA Rt 182 A O 193 LOOP CRAIG ala iit 215 eel ate Ml la gt Jl e doce asas gasto acea A 219 A d SS Tad rats t bun E uM Fon DIG REND 223 ENDS al qoc 231 BAC AQUI
350. sword Enter your new system password Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 267 Chapter 35 Access Control 35 5 Service Port Access Control Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access the Switch Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control to view the screen as shown Figure 176 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control Service Access Control g Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet M p3 SSH Ie 22 FTP 2 NN HTTP Iv o 3 Minutes HTTPS v 443 ICMP Vv SNMP v m Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 109 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this opt
351. t If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 136 Loop Guard Probe Packet A B The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 26 Loop Guard as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 137 Loop Guard Network Loop Note After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 8 7 on page 75 or via commands See the CLI Reference Guide 26 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the naviga
352. t DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN network V Create a VLAN containing ports 5 6 and 7 Connect a computer M to the Switch for management Figure 25 Tutorial DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview Note For related information about DHCP snooping see Section 25 1 on page 193 The settings in this tutorial are as the following Table 6 Tutorial Settings in this Tutorial Host i ecre VAN eo Serge moron DHCP Server A 5 1 and 100 100 Yes DHCP Client B 6 1 and 100 100 No DHCP Client C 7 1 and 100 100 No 1 Access the Switch through http 192 168 1 1 by default username default admin and password default 1234 Log into the Switch by entering the GS2200 8 24 User s Guide CA Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Go to Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN and create a VLAN with ID of 100 Add ports 5 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown Deselect Tx Tagging because you don t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag Click Add Figure 26 Tutorial Create a VLAN and Add Ports to It a Ei iD ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Normal Normal C Normal Normal C Normal C Normal C Normal Norma Control Normal C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden C Fixed C Forbidden Fixed C Forbidden Fixed C Forbidden Fixed C Forbidden
353. tance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 15 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between O and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance e Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this ro
354. tatic link aggregation Aggregation Setting Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group EJ GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 43 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk By default the Switch uses the src dst mac distribution type If the Switch is behind a router the packet s destination or source MAC address will be changed In this case set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make sure port trunking can work properly Select src mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s source MAC address Select dst mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address Select src dst mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses Select src ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s source IP address Select dst ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination IP address Select src dst ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Port Group This field displays the port
355. ter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 25 9 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port To GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Port Figure 130 ARP Inspection Port Configure 49 09 74 4 9 GFA or ai gt i0 ARP Inspection Port Configure Configure Limit Port Trusted State A a A A NN Rate pps Burst interval seconds Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted y Untrusted v Untrusted y Untrusted y AO TTT Apply Cancel d The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION
356. the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network OD Static VLAN ACTIVE v Name Example VLAN Group ID 2 bl x Tanne 1 C Normal Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 9 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 1 Fixe fj Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear Control VLAN Status Tagging Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example In the
357. the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch GS2200 8 24 User s Guide MAC Table 39 1 Overview This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen 39 1 1 What You Can Do Use the MAC Table screen Section 39 2 on page 297 to check whether the MAC address is dynamic or static 39 1 2 What You Need to Know The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port f the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestio
358. tic cables to the transceiver Figure 13 Transceiver Installation Example 3 2 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Remove the fiber optic cables from the transceiver 2 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary 3 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 15 Removing the Fiber Optic Cables 3 2 4 Power Connector Note Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Chapter 3 Hardware Panels To connect power to the Switch insert the female end of the power cord to the AC power receptacle on the front panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to a power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans located on the side of the unit See Chapter 43 on page 307 for information on the Switch s power supply requirements 3 3 LEDs After you connect the power to the Switch view the LEDs to ensure proper functioning of the Switch and as an aid in troubleshooting Table 3 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off or has failed SYS Green On The system is on and functioning properly Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunc
359. ticast Forward Setup Click Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 66 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding VID Port a Static Multicast Forwarding Active Name MAC Address r p iE dst Es d p A Index Active Ada Cancel Clear Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here If you don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 Port Enter the port s where frames with destinat
360. time 69 D daylight saving time 70 default Ethernet settings 34 DHCP 244 configuration options 244 modes 244 Option 82 245 overview 244 relay agent 244 relay agent information 245 relay example 248 setup 247 VLAN setting 247 DHCP relay 245 configuration 246 example 247 DHCP relay option 82 212 DHCP snooping 51 194 211 configuring 213 DHCP relay option 82 212 trusted ports 211 untrusted ports 211 DHCP snooping database 212 diagnostics 285 Ethernet port test 286 ping 286 system log 285 Differentiated Service DiffServ 240 DiffServ 240 activate 241 DS field 240 DSCP 240 network example 241 PHB 241 dimensions 307 disclaimer 321 DS Differentiated Services 240 DSCP service level 240 what it does 241 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 240 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP dynamic link aggregation 137 E egress port 99 egress rate and bandwidth control 130 error disable detect 233 error disable recovery configuration 234 overview 231 Ethernet broadcast address 250 299 Ethernet port test 286 external authentication server 183 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Index F fan speed 68 FCC interference statement 321 file transfer using FTP command example 259 filename convention configuration configuration file names 259 filtering 107 rules 107 filtering database MAC table 296 firmware 67 upgrade 257 295 flow control 76 back pressure 76 IEEE802 3x 76 forwarding delay 121 fra
361. tion IP Source Guard ARP Inspection VLAN Status Figure 127 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Show VLAN range VID OF Inspection VLAN Status Status 9 Enabled VLAN D Selected VLAN Start VID End VID Received Request Reply Forwarded Dropped The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VI D and the highest VLAN ID End VI D you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 25 IP Source Guard Table 74 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch
362. tion panel to display the screen as shown Note The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 138 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LE Loop Guard Active O hr o a gt 2 SiS E ERAS om gm ee HaHaHa Hu Haj Apply Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 217 Chapter 26 Loop Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays the port number s Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the switch it is connected to is in loop state If the switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses
363. tioning PPS Green On External power supply is turned on GS2200 24P Off External power supply is turned off or has failed only ALM Red On A hardware failure is detected Off The system is functioning normally Ethernet Ports LNK ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down PoE Amber On Power is supplied to all PoE Ethernet ports GS2200 8HP Off There is no power supply or GS2200 24P only FDX Amber On The Gigabit port is negotiating in full duplex mode GS2200 24 or Off The Gigabit port is negotiating in half duplex mode GS2200 24P only Mini GBIC Slots LNK Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up GS2200 8 8HP only Off The link to this port is not connected ACT Green Blinking This port is receiving or transmitting data GS2200 8 24 User s Guide PART ll once The Web Configurator 4 1 Overview This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later Netscape Navigator 7
364. to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server Figure 181 HTTPS Implementation WS 449 80 HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 35 7 3 1 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access Internet Explorer Warning Messages I nternet Explorer 6 When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 182 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer 6 x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or ie changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid A The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate Internet Ex
365. ts Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing subnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN
366. uce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 19 on page 151 for more information on port security Click Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding OD Static MAC Forwarding J Active ri Name MAC Address I kb kb hb kL 1 d VID Port Ada Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The S
367. umber This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 87 Chapter 9 VLAN 9 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next 88 Figure 53 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Xin D VLAN Status ACTIVE O Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal y M TxTagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Tagging 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging g Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging Fixe Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete Yes 1 rH ary Delete Cancel The following table describes the related
368. ure 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Set the Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack The Switch can be mounted on an EIA standard size 19 inch rack or in a wiring closet with other equipment Follow the steps below to mount your Switch on a standard EIA rack using a rack mounting kit 2 3 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 3 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 3 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 5 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Phil
369. ure the screen in this chapter 29 1 2 1 CPU Protection Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information If a switch receives large numbers of control packets such as ARP BPDU or IGMP packets which are to be processed by the CPU the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular tasks properly The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP BPDU and IGMP packets to be delivered to the CPU on a port This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS attacks or errors from other network s You then can choose to drop control packets that exceed the specified rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received 29 1 2 2 Error Disable Recovery Some features such as loop guard or CPU protection allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port For example if the Switch detects that packets sent out the port s loop back to the Switch the Switch can shut down the port s automatically After that you need to enable the port s or allow the packets on a port manually via the web configurator or the commands With error disable recovery you can set the disabled port s to become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you specify GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 231 Chapter 29 Error Disable 29 2 The Error Disable Screen Use this screen t
370. ure your TACACS accounting settings Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 187 Chapter 24 AAA 24 5 AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication and authorization settings on the Switch Click on the A
371. ve button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management 38 4 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter 38 4 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 195 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen Status El Logout B Help hsic Setting Member Menu vanced Application Ronostic Port Setup Broadcast Storm Control puting Protocol Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management anageme VLAN Static Route Setup Diagnostic anagement a General Setup Sex ome MAC Table Switch Setup Spanning 1r rofocol ARP Table intenance IP Setup Bandwid ontro Port Status Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Access Control DiffServ GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 38 Cluster Management 38 4 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch thr
372. version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MI Bs GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 43 Product Specifications Table 131 Standards Supported continued GS2200 8HP only STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2233 ifVHCPacketGroup RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2674 P BRIDGE MIB Q BRIDGE MIB RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2925 PI NG MIB fand TRACEROUTE MIB RFC 3046 DHCP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management CFM IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3x Flow Control IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3at High Power over Ethernet EEE802 3az GS2200 8 and GS2200 8HP only Energy Efficient Eth
373. w apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 27 on page 110 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance
374. warding delay 115 118 Hello BPDU 110 Hello Time 115 116 118 119 how it works 110 Max Age 115 116 118 119 path cost 110 115 118 port priority 115 118 port state 111 root port 110 status 115 118 terminology 110 vs loop guard 215 subnet based VLAN 93 and DHCP VLAN 93 priority 93 setup 92 subnet based VLANs 91 switch lockout 44 switch reset 45 switch setup 71 syntax conventions 6 syslog 214 287 protocol 287 server setup 289 settings 287 setup 287 severity levels 287 system information 67 system log 285 system reboot 257 T TACACS 182 183 setup 186 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 182 tagged VLAN 83 temperature 308 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Index temperature indicator 67 terminal emulation 33 time current 69 time zone 70 Time RFC 868 69 time server 69 time service protocol 69 format 69 trademarks 321 transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA 34 transceivers 34 installation 34 removal 35 traps destination 263 trunk group 137 trunking 137 example 143 trusted ports ARP inspection 214 DHCP snooping 211 PPPoEIA 225 tunnel protocol attribute and RADIUS 191 tutorials 51 DHCP snooping 51 Type of Service ToS 240 U UDLD 222 UniDirectional Link Detection see UDLD untrusted ports ARP inspection 214 DHCP snooping 211 PPPoEIA 225 user profiles 183 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA 190 ventilation 27 VID 86 87 numb
375. ween the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 5 Technical Reference This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter 17 5 1 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 88 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting n this screen activate trunk group T1
376. wing table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 P Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 32 DHCP 32 3 1 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 159 Global DHCP Relay Network Example ho DHCP Server B 7 192 168 1 100 uu a Configure the DHCP Relay screen as show
377. witch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Static Multicast Forward Setup 11 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on multicast MAC addresses of devices on your network Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding 11 1 1 What You Can Do Use the Static Multicast Forward Setup screen
378. works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 180 How SSH Works 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 277 Chapter 35 Access Control 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 35 7 2 2 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 35 7 2 3 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer
379. xample Group Configuration Multicast VLAN ID 200 lt pel Name Start Address End Address Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Ada Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 o News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 O Delete Cancel Figure 114 MVR Group Configuration Example A Group Configuration MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 add Cancel MYLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel GS2200 8 24 User s Guide AAA 24 1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure authentication and authorization settings on the Switch The external servers that perform authentication and authorization functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section on page 183 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section on page 183 as external authentication and authorization servers Figure 115 AAA Server bo mmm a BN Client AAA Server 24 1 1 What You Can Do Use the AAA screen Section 24 2 on page 183 to enable authentication and authorization or both of them on the Switch use the RADI US Server Setup screen Section 24 3 on page 183 to configure your RADIUS server settings Use the T
380. xt Use the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol screen Section 13 6 on page 117 to configure MRSTP Use the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen Section 13 7 on page 118 to view the MRSTP status Use the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol screen Section 13 8 on page 120 to configure MSTP Use the MSTP Port Configuration screen Section 13 8 1 on page 123 to configure MSTP ports Use the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen Section 13 9 on page 123 to view the MSTP status 13 1 2 What You Need to Know Read on for concepts on STP that can help you configure the screens in this chapter GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the networ
381. y Scenario b DHCP Server 192 168 2 3 VLAN 102 172 16 1 18 6 3 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port GS2200 8 24 User s Guide EN Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Figure 33 Tutorial Set VLAN Type to 802 1Q a EES NEN VLAN Type LEAD O Port Based Join Timer 200 E milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer leoo milliseconds Leave All Timer 110000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level 7 v Level amp gg Level5 5 v Level4 4v Level3 3v Level2 Hv Level1 lo v Level 2 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending GS2200 8 24 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Figure 34 Tutorial Create a Static VLAN Xi NND ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Normal
382. y port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh GS2200 8 24 User s Guide 173 Chapter 23 Multicast 23 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See IGMP Snooping and VLANs on page 169 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 107 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN MIRE Mode Multicast Setting C auto C fixed VLAN Index Name VID Name VID Delete Apply Cancel m Ada Cancel Clear Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only l

ZyXEL GS2200-8/24 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents